JP2022090094A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem which a player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first privilege imparting means capable of imparting a first privilege which is advantageous to a player when first identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific first determination result in display means; second determination means capable of executing a second determination; second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means in the display means; second dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means; second privilege imparting means capable of imparting a second privilege which is advantageous to a player when second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific second determination result in the display means; and privilege variable means for varying a privilege to be imparted in the second privilege, on the basis of an imparting timing of the second privilege, thereby increasing an interest in a game and suppressing a problem which a player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the hobby of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. Was aimed at improving the interest by providing the game to the players.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392

However, the lottery game executed when the game ball wins the starting winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means. The first dynamic display means that can be dynamically displayed and the first dynamic display period that can determine the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. When the first identification information is displayed on the determination means and the display means for showing the specific first determination result, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given. The giving means, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means. The target display means, the second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first item specific to the display means. 2 The second privilege granting means, which can grant the second privilege advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the determination result, is provided, and the second privilege is provided. It has a privilege variable means for varying the privilege given by the second privilege based on the grant timing of the above.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, the second privilege is granted during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means in the gaming machine according to claim 1. Based on this, the first control that can execute the first control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to other than the specific first determination result. It has means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege. When the first control is executed, it is possible to notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege that could be given.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the display means dynamically displays the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means. A first dynamic display means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display period. When the first identification information is displayed on the display means in a display mode for showing the specific first determination result, the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the first privilege granting means. A second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means by the second determination means. The second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means and the second determination result specific to the display means are shown. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in the display mode for the purpose, based on the timing of granting the second privilege. Therefore, it has a privilege variable means for varying the privilege given by the second privilege.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first, which is dynamically displayed, based on the execution of the grant of the second privilege during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. It has a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.

Therefore, by executing the first control, it is possible to avoid the granting of the first privilege, and there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege, and can be granted when the first control is executed. It is possible to notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege.

Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the type of the first privilege that has not been granted by the suggestion information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the third symbol in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when there is a reserved ball only in special figure 1 at the ending of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the dash mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1 Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the end of the dash mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the end of the dash mode, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the latent probability state is set after the big hit displayed in, and (c) is the third symbol display displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot displayed on the device and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the above, and (c) shows the contents of the second hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the latent probability table set in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a temporary stop process of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 cancellation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the contents of the display screen in a probable change state displayed by a device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 (non-variation in special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of special figure 2 small hit in RUSH displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 (during the change of special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped during the fluctuation per special figure 1 displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot special selection 2 table for probability variation latent probability set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 3 table set in the ROM of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the migration destination selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 1 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the number of residual probability changes is 30 times or more at the time of transition to the latent probability state in the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game when the number of residual probability changes is less than 30 times at the time of transition to a latent probability state in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the small hit B is won in the state where the remaining number of RUSH is 30 times or more, and (b) is the figure which is small when the remaining number of RUSH is less than 30 times. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a hit B. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables for normal use set in the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables for probability variation / latency set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit display selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the number of times related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the aircraft to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. Ball mouth 63, upper first ball opening 64b1, lower first ball opening 64b2, second ball opening 640, left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable It is configured by assembling the display device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 penetrate through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has entered (winned) into the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 or the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not the ball has been entered (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball However, when a ball is entered (winning) in the second entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37A shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. The first symbol display device 37B is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. ..

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is triggered by the fact that there is a ball entry (winning) in the upper first entry slot 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. Is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the ball is easily won in the specific winning opening 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650, and each winning opening is in an open state. By winning a ball, a game in which many prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and then the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the opening period (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, or the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65) is executed. , A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the next A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the round game is started, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The ending period in which the state is set and the jackpot game period consisting of the ending period are set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), by setting the opening period, the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots to be determined are 16 rounds of jackpot games, a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot, a 16R latent jackpot with a low probability of a normal symbol, and a jackpot. High probability state of special symbol after big hit with 2 rounds of game, 2R latent jackpot with low probability of normal symbol, high probability state of special symbol after big hit with 2 rounds of big hit game , A 2R probability variation jackpot that gives a high probability state of a normal symbol is prepared.

In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is not the above-mentioned big hit, but a part of the case where it is determined to be out of the game, the privilege less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the right variable winning device 650 is opened only for one round, and the opening is in progress. The privilege of giving a prize ball corresponding to the number of balls won in the game) is configured to win a small hit given to the player. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is not only indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

In the present embodiment, any one of "normal state", "latent probability state", and "probability change state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/229), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to low probability (11/233). In the game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the normal symbol hits. It is a gaming state in which the probability is set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won is set. It is configured so that the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game. As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game while being aware of the set game state.

Here, to explain in detail the jackpot type of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "16R latent probability jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 (right variable winning device (second attacker) 650). This is a jackpot type in which a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set after a jackpot game that opens for 16 rounds.

"2R latent jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 for 2 rounds) and then a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol). , A low-probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a jackpot type.

"2R probability change jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (left variable winning device (1st attacker) 65 is opened for 2 rounds, and the probability change state after the jackpot game (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) This is the jackpot type for which the high probability state) is set.

When the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot" is executed in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is set for a predetermined period (30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls). A game (round game) that is released (a period until a prize is won) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times). Therefore, by performing a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right variable winning device 650) during this jackpot game, the right variable winning device 650 can easily win a ball. The right variable winning device 650 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning ball, and more prize balls are given to the player than the left variable winning device 65 described later. It is configured so that it can be done.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" or the "2R latent jackpot", the jackpot game corresponding to the above-mentioned "16R latent jackpot" is performed as the opening operation of the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65. A more restricted opening operation is performed. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) during one big hit game is executed twice, and a big hit game is executed. Will be done. The left variable winning device 650 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning ball, and less prize balls than the above-mentioned right variable winning device 650 are given to the player. Will be. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot" has a longer opening period of the attacker during the jackpot game than the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" or the "2R latent jackpot". Is long and is configured so that many prize balls can be easily obtained. With this configuration, different amounts of benefits (prize balls) can be given to the player according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, so that the player wins the jackpot. It is possible to make people interested not only in whether or not to do it, but also in the set jackpot type. In this embodiment, the jackpot game (the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot") that is advantageous to the player is executed a larger number of round games than the other jackpot games, and further. It is configured so that the number of prize balls for each winning ball is also large, but it is sufficient if the amount of prize balls given during the jackpot game is different, for example, it is executed during the jackpot game. The number of rounds to be played may be the same and only the number of prize balls for one ball may be different, or the number of prize balls for one ball may be the same and only the number of round games executed during the jackpot game. It may be configured to be different. Further, the game state set after the end of the big hit game may be configured to be different depending on the type of the variable winning opening that is opened during the big hit game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a general entry slot 63 is provided in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. To the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and to the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. There is provided with a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower parts are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time.

In addition, as a process for determining that an illegal game (for example, a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed and notifying an abnormality, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example) by the right-handed game. It is preferable to configure it so that the abnormality notification is executed when it is determined that the number is 2 or more. As a result, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of balls fired due to a player's operation error from invading the right side region and executing abnormality notification.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol height is increased by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 that flow down the left area (about). 50%) is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 through which a ball can enter is arranged. Further, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37A shows a display according to the lottery result.

Below the upper first ball entry port 64b1, a lower first ball entry port 64b2 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the first entry opening switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37A shows a display according to the lottery result. That is, in the first embodiment, the same jackpot lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is used regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. ) Is configured to be executed.

A second entrance 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged in the right region of the game board 13 on the right side of the lower first entrance 64b2. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. Further, a general ball entry port 63 is arranged in the left side region of the game board. The general entry port 63 is arranged so that among the balls flowing down the left side region, the balls flowing down the flow path where it is difficult to reach the left variable winning device 65 can easily enter. As a result, for example, during a jackpot game in which the left variable winning device 65 is open, even if a ball fired by the left-handed game flows down a flow path that cannot win the left variable winning device 65, the player is given a privilege. (Prize ball) can be given.

When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entry opening 640, one ball is paid out. It is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. Further, when a ball enters the general entry port 63, six balls are paid out as prize balls. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls increases because the ball only wins at the second entrance 640 where one prize ball is set. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being performed during the normal state.

Further, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, but in the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state. 2 As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of the special symbol (special drawing 2), a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, even if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the lottery for the special figure 2 from being efficiently executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the right-handed game (the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the right area of the game board 13 in the state where the normal state is set, Even if the game for entering the ball into the second entrance 640) is executed, it takes a long time until the result of one lottery is confirmed, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the left-handed game is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It is structured so that only a small number of prize balls can be won. That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the upper first is to execute the left-handed game (the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13). It is an advantageous game for the player to perform a game (a game for entering a ball into the ball entry port 64b1).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 and the case where the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. The number of prize balls to be paid out is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out, but the number of prize balls to be paid out and the second ball to be paid out when a ball is won in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry slot 64b2. The same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the mouth 640, for example, the prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. The number may also be configured as one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured in a single blade shape, and is in a closed state that restricts the ball from entering the lower first entry port 64b2 (see the electric accessory 64a (solid line) in FIG. 2). The ball is variably controlled to an open state (see the electric accessory 64a (broken line) in FIG. 2) that allows the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

The electric accessory 64a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured to prevent the ball from entering the lower first entry port 64b2. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) by lottery, the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is composed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the accessory for the effect (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22. It may be configured in.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7 (a). 5 (a) and 5 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (Refer to FIG. 6A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 6A), and the special symbol lottery is performed. It is configured to show the result, but is not limited to this, for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that deforms a figure by using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, and a display mode. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed by the display mode which changes a color, and stopping and displaying the display mode which shows a specific symbol or a color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding the fact and the display mode of "right-handed" are configured to be displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the right variable winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left-handed" is a predetermined period (for example, after the right-handed game is completed). It is configured to be displayed (for 10 seconds). Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state or the probabilistic state, the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) ". It is configured so that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 5 (b). Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm1a is the area where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (reserved) is displayed. The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6A, but in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the reserved winning information is stored in advance. It is configured to display a display mode in which the discriminated result (look-ahead result) can be suggested and notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a new ball is inserted into the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. Continue until you hit the ball. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640 However, it is rare that there is no entry, and in many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games have been played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a new ball has entered any of the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. In that case, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the upper 1 entry port 64b1, the lower 1st entry opening 64b2, or the 2nd entry opening 640 (starting prize), the first special is set in the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. The variable display of the symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variablely displayed at the same time, and it is easy to draw (change) each special symbol according to the set gaming state. Is configured to be different. Then, the lottery (variation) is executed in the game state in which the third symbol, which is the target of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, is set among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured to be a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is easily created. With such a configuration, regardless of which game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable effect using the third symbol at all times, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. The configuration is not limited to the configuration used in the present embodiment, and for example, the type of the special symbol to be associated as the third symbol may be changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The one-time variation effect may be configured to be set based on both the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the special figure 2. Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set is executed, and 5 seconds later, the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of 50 seconds is set is executed, the variation is 30 seconds. When the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, a fluctuation effect of 55 seconds is set, and within the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery result) of 30 seconds and the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation of 50 seconds are set. The result (lottery result) may be configured to notify the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the lottery results of a plurality of special symbol lottery by one variation effect, so that the lottery result set when both the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change are out of order is out of order. It is possible to make the number of variable effects set to indicate that the number is smaller than the number of lottery (number of fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to the frequent execution of the variable effect indicating the deviation.

First, among the effect contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability of the normal symbol) after the jackpot game of the present embodiment is completed. The flow of the game when the state) is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (b) and 7 (c). FIG. 7B is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "0" at the end of the jackpot game. 7 (c) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "3" at the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, different gaming states are set after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type, and when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special figure 2 game (right-handed) The game) is set to be advantageous to the player. Specifically, during the latent state, the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is easier to be executed than in other gaming states (a short fluctuation time is easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery). This special figure 2 lottery is set so that it is easier to win a lottery result (big hit (big hit D), small hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery.

However, since the present embodiment is a game machine of the simultaneous fluctuation type (having a function of executing the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change at the same time (in parallel)), it is latent after the jackpot game is completed. After the state is set, the right-handed game is performed, the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) is being executed, but the special figure 1 is held at the end of the big hit game. If is remembered, or if the ball launched after the jackpot game ends, enters the upper 1 entry slot 64b1 or the lower 1st entry slot 64b2, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed. Become. Then, when the big hit is won by the special figure 1 lottery prior to the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit), the player is in the latent state. There is a problem that the jackpot game, which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed, which gives the player a sense of distrust. In order to solve the problem, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit), the big hit of the running special figure 1 is performed. It is configured so that the fluctuation can be forcibly stopped by deviating from the lottery result (variation result). In addition, as the lottery probability of special figure 2, the probability of winning a small hit (about 1/2 in the special figure high probability state) is higher than the probability of winning a big hit (about 1/110 in the special figure high probability state). It is configured to have a high probability. With this configuration, even if the jackpot fluctuation of Special Figure 1 is executed while the latent state is set, the special figure 2 game can be executed multiple times during the fluctuation period. It is possible to forcibly remove and stop the jackpot fluctuation of 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a jackpot game based on the special figure 1 lottery (a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot game based on the special figure 2 lottery) during the latent state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a feeling of distrust. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state can be set immediately after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game. When the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the situation in which the special figure 1 has the reserved memory at the time when the latent state is set and the special figure 2 does not have the reserved memory is likely to occur. In this state, if the player interrupts the game (restroom break), the lottery of Special Figure 1 is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved memories during the latent state, and the special figure 1 is executed during the latent state. There was a problem that the jackpot in FIG. 1 was won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, if there is a reserved ball in the special figure 1, the right-handed game is promptly executed and the ball is sent to the second entrance 640. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect of prompting the player to enter the ball and win a small hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery and prevent the player from being provided with a big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player in the latent state.

First, referring to FIG. 7 (b), in the case of shifting to the latent state after the end of the big hit game, when there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the end of the big hit game (at the end (ED)) (0 pieces). The flow of the display contents of the effect executed in (Case) will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is held at the time of entering the ending (ED) period (see FIG. 7 (b) A) set after the end of the last round game executed during the jackpot game. If it is determined that there is no special figure 1 hold (0) by the determination, the special figure is in the latent state based on the special figure 1 hold stored by the end of the jackpot game. 1 Since the fluctuation is not (difficult to be) executed, a display mode (for super mode) indicating that the latent state (super mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game. ED) is displayed. Then, at the end of the ED period (see FIG. 7 (b) B), that is, when the jackpot game ends and the special figure change (special figure change in the latent state) is executed, there is no special figure 1 reserved ball. Displays a display mode of a super mode (a mode corresponding to the latent state) as a display mode indicating the latent state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), when it is determined that there are (three) reserved balls in Special Figure 1 at the time of entering the ending ED period of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (c) A), the ED is determined. A display mode (ED for dash) for prompting the player to promptly execute the right-handed game during the period is displayed. Then, if the special figure 1 reserved ball exists at the end of the ED period, that is, at the time when the jackpot game ends and the special figure change (special figure change in the latent state) is executed, the player is promptly notified. The display mode of the dash mode is displayed as the display mode for executing the right-handed game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, the condition for executing the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) is satisfied in advance during the latent probability state (latent). In order to prevent the game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed during the jackpot game in which the probability state is set), the special figure 2 fluctuation (when there is a special figure 1 hold). The display mode for actively executing the lottery) (display mode for encouraging the right-handed game) is configured to be displayed from the ED period of the jackpot game. As a result, the special figure 2 variation (lottery) can be executed immediately after the game in the latent state is started, and the special figure 1 variation (lottery) being executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 2 variation (lottery) can be executed. The lottery) can be forcibly stopped (discarded). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) during the latent state, and it is possible to provide the game in which the player is less likely to feel unpleasant.

Next, the display contents displayed during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during ED when the reserved ball of special figure 1 is present at the start of the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, a rabbit character 811 and a turtle character 814 are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, a specific character (characters 811, 814) is configured to be displayed on the display screen. With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline (advantage) of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 or the character 814 is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 6A, a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) in a state where the normal state is set, and as a jackpot game, the left variable winning device 65 (first attacker) shown in FIG. 2 is used. It shows an example of the ending screen when the open operation round game is executed twice (2 rounds) and the "2R latent jackpot" in which the latent state is set after the big hit game is executed is executed. be. In this "2R latent jackpot", in order to execute a left-handed game to make the first attacker win a ball during the jackpot game, a round game is performed (the second round game is performed after the jackpot game is started). During the period until the end), a "left-handed" comment is displayed in the display area Dm3. Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the reserved ball of the special figure 1 exists at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game, the guidance display mode of “right-handed” is displayed in the display area Dm3. At the same time, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Hurry up and hit the right and finish before the turtle !!" is displayed in order to encourage the right-handed game. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to play a right-handed game in a hurry (during the ending period). That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, since the game before the big hit is won and the big hit game are both left-handed games, the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is played. The latent state is set while the value remains 0, and there is a possibility that only the special figure 1 lottery (variation) will be executed during the latent state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a game (left) for causing the player to acquire the reserved ball of the special figure 2 at a time point before the latent state is set (ending period of the jackpot game). Since it is configured to display the display mode for encouraging the hitting game), it is possible to shorten the period from the setting of the latent probability state to the execution of the special figure 2 variation (lottery). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, a special figure 1 big hit game) during the latent state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the holding suggestion display mode for suggesting the current number of holding balls is displayed in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e. Here, the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e are display areas in which the hold suggestion display mode for suggesting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is displayed, and specifically, the number of hold balls is 1. , Dm4a to Dm4b, Dm4a to Dm4c when the number of reserved balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4d when the number of reserved balls is 3, and Dm4a to Dm4e when the number of reserved balls is 4. The hold suggestion display mode is formed as described above. Then, the character "GOAL" is displayed in the small display area Dm4a, and when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes "0", the effect that the character 811 reaches the goal is executed. In this way, in the dash mode having playability for the purpose of setting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 to 0, the player can visually discriminate the process of subtracting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1. By configuring it so as to be, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect. In FIG. 6A, the small display area Dm1a is "3", that is, since the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 3, the display areas Dm4a to the display area Dm4d are lit and displayed. Further, in the display area Dm1 where the fourth symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, the jackpot symbol "555" corresponding to the running jackpot game shows the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the display area Dm2 on which the fourth symbol for the purpose is displayed, the symbol "246" for indicating that the previous lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order is displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, the symbol "246" is displayed. The character "100" is used as a prize ball display mode to indicate the number of prize balls acquired in this big hit game (2R latent jackpot), and the small display area Dm6 is used to notify the progress of the big hit game. The characters "Round END" are displayed.

Next, the display content displayed when the special figure 1 holding ball is present at the time when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball exists at the time when the latent probability state is set, as shown in FIG. 6B, the dash mode is performed even in the latent probability state. Is configured to be set continuously. During the latent state, it is configured to be advantageous to the player to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game and execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Then, if a big hit or a small hit is won with the second special symbol, the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the deviation. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the first special symbol is better than the second special symbol when the fluctuation time is also in the latent state. Since a long fluctuation time is set, it is extremely rare that the first special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player during the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

However, if the player does not execute the right-handed game when only the first special symbol has the number of reserved balls after the transition to the latent state, the change time of the first special symbol elapses and the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. There was a possibility that it would end up. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit, the dash mode for promptly executing the right-handed game by the player is not the super mode displayed in the latent state. Is displayed, and an effect for digesting the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed.

In FIG. 7B, a rabbit-like character 811 and a turtle-like character 814 are competing for GOAL812 in the center of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the center of the display screen. The comment "Hurry up and hit right !!" is displayed. Further, the guidance display mode of "right-handed" is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. By displaying the display mode for guiding the right-handed hit in both the sub-display area Ds and the small display area Dm3 in this way, the player can emphasize and notify the right-handed game. In addition, by changing the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to an appropriate game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continuously execute the disadvantageous game. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the small display area Dm2a indicates the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The state in which two are acquired is displayed. Further, the small display area Dm1a indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, a lighting display indicating that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 is displayed in the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b.

Returning to FIG. 7 (c), the explanation will be continued. The dash mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and the production is switched to the super mode corresponding to the latent state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7A, a display screen indicating the end of the dash mode will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcedly stopped in the off symbol, and the dash mode is set. By winning a small hit with the 2nd special symbol during the latent state, it ends when the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol becomes 0, and the player is shown to be in the latent state in the super mode. It becomes a display mode.

In the center of the main display area Dm, it is displayed that the character 811 imitating a rabbit competing in the dash mode passes through GOAL812 before the character 814 imitating a turtle. Then, the comment "GOAL !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the dash mode has ended.

Then, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and at the same time, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "357" indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Further, the upper display area Dm4a is lit and displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has disappeared, and the dash mode is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol and the execution of the special figure 1 change is forcibly stopped (discarding the special figure 1 change), the lottery of the first special symbol is made. The display area Dm1 for displaying the result is configured to stop the forced out symbol "357" instead of the actual lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the discarded special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) It is preferable to configure the display mode so that the result (lottery result) can be suggested (notified) to the player so that the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the color of the out-of-order symbol "357" displayed in the display area Dm1 is changed. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery so that it can be suggested to the player. Specifically, when the display mode of "357" is displayed in red, it indicates that the lottery result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery is "big hit", and when it is displayed in rainbow color. Is a "big hit" that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is the smallest, and the latent state is not set after the big hit game is completed. ) ”. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded and is out of order, and the lottery result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player grasp the privilege given by discarding the special figure 1 lottery. Further, instead of the display mode in the display area Dm1, the stop display mode of the third symbol of the main display area Dm and the display mode for showing the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game are changed to be discarded. FIG. 1 The result of the lottery may be suggested (notified), or may be suggested (notified) by using a voice output means or a light emitting means. With such a configuration, the player can get a sense of security that he / she was able to prevent the player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot. Further, when the look-ahead result is a big hit, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, and it is possible to further enhance the staging effect.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high of the normal symbol). Three game states can be set: a probability state), a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, and a low probability state of a normal symbol), and the type of jackpot won and the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that a predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14). The plurality of gaming states set here are configured so that the degree of advantage to the player is different, and the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

First, a case where a normal state is set as a game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a process is executed when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 9) has been operated in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 51)). ) Is set as the normal state.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if jackpot A (71% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the probability changes after the jackpot game ends. When the state (challenge mode) is set and the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) or the jackpot C (4% of the jackpot win) is set, the latent state (super mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot winning), and the submarine is hidden after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the correct state (super mode) is set.

That is, in the normal state, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a 71% chance of entering the challenge mode (probability change state) and a 29% chance of entering the super mode (potential state). Further, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the super mode (latent state) is set with a 100% probability. In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is executed during the normal state, the variation time for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, in reality, the game (right-handed game) for executing the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is not performed. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is configured to be set to a long-time fluctuation regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set, or the fluctuation when the jackpot is won (big hit). A short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set only for the fluctuation). Here, in the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of big hits (the number of big hits after winning the big hit (first hit) in the normal state) reaches 3 times (including the first hit) (when the limit number is reached). Because the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the limit number of times is reached while the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed is set, FIG. 2 The normal state may be set with the hold acquired. Even in such a case, the special figure acquired during the latent state is configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set. 2 The hold can be smoothly digested (execution of lottery). Furthermore, when the jackpot of the special figure 2 lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the latent state is higher with a higher probability (100% in this embodiment) than when the jackpot of the special figure 1 lottery is won. Since it is set, it is possible to smoothly execute a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game is improved. Can be done.

Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state when the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the left-handed game is executed while the probability change state is set, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed. Then, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 during the probability change state, if jackpot A (60% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type, the probability change state (challenge mode) after the jackpot game ends. ) Is set to loop. Further, when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot winning) are set, the latent state (super mode) is set.

Further, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold, the big hit D (100% of the big hit win) is set as the big hit type. It is configured so that the probability change state is set again after the jackpot game is completed.

In other words, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability change state, the probability change state (challenge mode) is set to loop with a probability of 60%, and the latent state (super mode) is set with a probability of 40%. Will be done. Then, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability change state is set with a 100% probability. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the latent state based on the jackpot winning when the probabilistic state is set than when the normal state is set. As a result, the degree of expectation for shifting to the latent state can be gradually increased, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (3 times), the normal state is forcibly set after the end of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot is forcibly set during the normal state. The rate of transition to the latent state is higher when the jackpot is won in the normal state and the jackpot is won during the probable change state, which is transferred when the jackpot does not shift to the latent state. Even if the value is set high, the player will not be given excessive benefits.

Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state in the state where the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game is performed. Then, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, if the big hit D (100% of the big hit winning) is set as the type of the big hit, the latent state is set again after the end of the big hit game.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, when the big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, when the big hit A (60% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the big hit. After the game is over, the probability change state is set, and when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot win) are set, the latent state (super mode) is set again after the jackpot game is over. Set.

In other words, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent probability state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a 40% probability, the probability change state is set with a 60% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery is performed. If you win the jackpot with, there is a 100% chance that you will loop the latent state (super mode). Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure variation executed during the latent state is configured so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Therefore, during the latent state, the right-handed game aiming at the special figure 2 lottery is an advantageous game method for the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 lottery, a small hit is won in a part of the case where the big hit is not won. If this small hit is won, a small hit game in which the amount of benefits that can be given to the player is smaller than that of the big hit is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit (about 1/2) in the special figure 2 lottery is set higher than the probability of winning a big hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set, the right-handed game can be played, and the small hit game can be executed a plurality of times until the big hit is won. With this configuration, even if the period during which the special figure 2 lottery does not win the big hit (the period during which the lottery results other than the big hit are continuously obtained) becomes longer during the latent state, many small hits are made accordingly. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, can be reliably looped by executing the lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the number of big hits reaches three times, the normal state is always set after the third big hit game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot type that shifts to the latent state at the first jackpot is won, the special figure 2 game in which the jackpot D, which is the most advantageous to the player, is always executed can be executed for the next two jackpots.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the latent probability state is set, that is, the execution of the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is defined as an appropriate gaming method. If the special figure 2 game is executed during the current game state and the jackpot is won, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player will be set, and there is a risk that the player will be given excessive benefits. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently in the normal state, so that the player in the normal state is given an excessive privilege (a privilege to set an advantageous gaming state). It can be suppressed.

In addition, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the proper game (left-handed game) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, the player It is possible to prevent an excessive privilege (a privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) from being given to the player.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than in the state in which the normal state is set, and the ball is placed at the second entry port 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult to enter the ball, it is difficult to execute the special figure 2 lottery, but it is not limited to this, and when the probability change state is set, it is higher than the state where the normal state is set. , Set the jackpot probability of the special symbol to a high probability, and make it easier to execute the new special figure 2 lottery (so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the special figure 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the state in which the probability variation state is set is more than the state in which the normal state is set. It may be configured so that the time set as the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, 3 minutes).

With this configuration, when the probabilistic state is set, a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn with the aim of shifting to the latent probable state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) does not shift to the latent state, but by executing many special symbol lottery, the second special symbol (special symbol) aims to see various variable effects (big hit effects). The player can select the game (right-handed game) in which the lottery is performed in 2).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. The hit type counter C5, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area corresponding to entry into the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2, which are composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to entry into the second entrance 640 consisting of 203a and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and the first 1 In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop are performed according to the timing of entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the small hit is also made in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the start opening (upper first entry slot 64b1, lower first entry opening 64b2, second entry) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values acquired by the ball entering the mouth 640), and is required among the acquired counter values when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied. By configuring the special symbol lottery to be executed using only the values, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits). , Parts and technologies can be standardized, and costs can be reduced.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It has a configuration to hold and store the value, but is not limited to this, and does not provide a function (hold storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 11A. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 8" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, small hits or misses).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 3" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a judgment value other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 2/458 (1/227), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 4/458 (1/109). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of the special symbol are prepared, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is the small hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that is the small hit specified in, it is judged as a small hit of the special symbol.

Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined regardless of the probability state and the high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the value of the first special symbol is small in the lottery. It is stipulated that you will not win a prize.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "112 to 342". That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (not won), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 224/458 (about 1/2). It is stipulated to be 1).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are different. It is configured so that in one process of executing a special symbol lottery (a process of determining whether or not there is a hit), a big hit hit / fail judgment and a small hit win / fail judgment are continuously (simultaneously) executed. is doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, a table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and a table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table 202b) are displayed. Although it is configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery. In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of the counter value for winning the small hit for each type of special symbol. With such a configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol, and the jackpot according to the determination value predetermined in advance according to the determined value. It is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big hit winnings or the number of small hit winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The first hit random number counter C1 value specified as a big hit winning or a small winning winning may be configured to be variable, or a big hit lottery or a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery, a data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit are not specified may be provided.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are executed. There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the jackpot is not won at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win a big hit, the lottery of special symbols should be executed by referring to the dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the big hit but only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It may be configured.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. At the same timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. As described above, the jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random number value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the normal state, and a probability variation / latent probability table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the probabilistic state or the latent state. Is included at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 13, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a table in which the gaming state is referred to in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 13, the normal table 202d1 has a plurality of types of special symbols won in the jackpot (special figures 1 and 2) and the acquired values of the first hit type counter C2 in association with each other. The jackpot type is specified.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 70". In the range of "71 to 95", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "96 to 99", "big hit C" is defined. Further, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", and "big hit D" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members executed during the jackpot game (opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 and left variable winning). The operation contents (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 of the device 65 and the switching member 650h) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario in which the operation contents (timing, number of times) are defined in time series.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, the operation contents of each movable member during the jackpot game in which a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and switching member 650h) are moved are timed. By using the open operation scenario specified in the series, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and in the case where a defect occurs in one movable member, the other It is possible to smoothly execute the motion processing for the movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 2 rounds and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for 2 rounds. This is the type of jackpot in which the game is executed. In this round game 1, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds as one round game. It is a round game to make you.

When "Big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to ON) after the big hit game is completed, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the high probability state of the special symbol is set). Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit A" is executed, the probability change state is set.

In "Big hit B", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds as a big hit game, and the big hit game in which the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is opened is executed during the 16 rounds. ..

When the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to off) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "big hit B" is executed, the latent state is set. During the latent state, as will be described in detail later, the jackpot type selected when the special figure 2 game is executed and the jackpot is won is selected with a 100% probability of "big hit D", which is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot game is completed, the "big hit B" in which the latent probability state is set is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

"Big hit C" is a big hit game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is a round, and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds. Is the type of jackpot that is executed.

When the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to off) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the latent state is set. Therefore, the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A", and since the number of rounds is small, the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the "big hit B".

In other words, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the normal state is set as the gaming state, there is a 71% probability of winning the jackpot game (“big hit A”) that is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured to win a jackpot game (“big hit B” or “big hit C”) that is disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 29%.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot advantageous to the player is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds is executed, and the game is played. If a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won, the jackpot game that opens the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 for 16 rounds is configured to be executed, so the type of jackpot that was won this time is advantageous. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the game is a big hit during the jackpot game, but the case is not limited to this, and the case where the player wins the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the case where the player wins the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. Then, it may be configured to execute a jackpot game in which the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65) is opened.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous depending on the game content of the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game It is possible to predict what the game state is set after the end until just before the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, each winning device (opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player). The contents of operation control of the opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 65f1 and opening / closing door 650f1) are the same so that the first attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open or closed state, and the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is supported. In the opening operation scenario, the operation control content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area is specified as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, and in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h is specified. As the motion control content for the above, the motion control content may be configured to specify the motion control content that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area.

Further, the operation control content of the switching member 650h is made the same in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first). The opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 65f1, opening / closing door 650f1) may be configured to have different timings for controlling the operation so that the attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open or closed state. By varying the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Therefore, the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and the jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area may be configured to be feasible.

Since the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "big hit B" is executed in "big hit D", detailed explanation of the contents of the jackpot game is omitted, but "big hit D" is selected only by the lottery of the second special symbol. It differs from the jackpot B in that it is different from the jackpot B, and since the latent state is set after the jackpot game of "big hit D" is completed, it is the most advantageous jackpot game for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the big hit game is set is set according to the type of the special symbol won in the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit winning. Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of jackpots is not limited to three, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the contents specified in the probability variation / latency table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability change / latency table 202d2. The probabilistic / latent probability table 202d2 is a table in which the gaming state is referred to in the probabilistic change state or the latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 14A, the probability variation / latent probability table 202d2 includes the types of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) that won the jackpot and the values of the acquired first hit type counter C2. In association with, multiple jackpot types are specified.

The probabilistic / latent probability table 202d2 differs from the normal table 202d1 in that the gaming state is referred to in the probabilistic state or the latent probability state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), "big hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 59", and "big hit B" is defined in the range of "60 to 84". Is specified, and the range of "85 to 99" is different in that "big hit C" is specified.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0 to 0). In 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball into the second entry port 640. ..

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type of small hit (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table 202 g.

Here, the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). In this small hit type selection table 202g, two types of small hit types are defined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, "small hit A" is defined in the range of the acquired small hit type counter value of "0 to 49", and "small hit B" is specified in the range of "50 to 99". ..

In the present embodiment, as described above, the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by a missed symbol according to the small hit type. is doing. Specifically, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped and "small". If it is "Hit B", it will be forcibly stopped due to the disconnection.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is a change that indicates a big hit when the special figure 2 game is being executed during the latent probability state, in the present embodiment, it is the first. 2 Since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of 1/2 in the lottery of special symbols, it prevents the player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot by temporarily stopping or forcibly stopping with a missed symbol. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are two types of small hits to be won, but two or less types may be used, or three or more types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to provide a small hit type in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol does not stop, to give the player a more thrilling feeling, and to provide various playability. can.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and different small hit types (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit. When the content) is set, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for each type of special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state where a normal state is set as a game state, and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state where a probability change state is set. And the latency table 202e3 used in the state where the latency state is set are specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". Various normal reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time are associated with the range of "51 to 100", and super reach A per 30 seconds of fluctuation time is associated with the range of "51 to 100". Super reach B per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range, and super reach C per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range of "151 to 198".

In addition, the lottery result is "off", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" with a short deviation of 8 seconds, and the variation time is in the range of "51 to 70". Is specified by associating a long deviation of 12 seconds with a deviation of 20 seconds in the range of "71 to 150", and is specified by associating a normal reach with a deviation of 30 seconds in the range of "151 to 170". Super reach A is associated and defined, and a deviation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "171 to 198" in association with super reach B.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball is made to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1 during the normal state. It is configured so that a game, that is, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol is executed is performed.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 18A. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18A, the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is " The range of "0 to 99" defines the normal fluctuation per 10 seconds of the fluctuation time, and the range of "100 to 198" defines the super fluctuation per 20 seconds of the fluctuation time. Further, in the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is defined in the entire range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. (Hit fluctuation, small hit fluctuation, missed fluctuation) are stipulated.

As described above, in the probabilistic state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than in the normal state. Further, it is configured so that the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficult) during the probabilistic state. Therefore, once the state changes to the probabilistic state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested in a short period of time.

Further, the fluctuation time (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. By configuring and grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Next, the contents of the latency table 202e3 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latency table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17B, the latent probability table 202e3 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1. , If the fluctuation pattern (hit long fluctuation, missed long fluctuation) of 10 minutes is specified and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (hit short fluctuation, small hit short fluctuation, missed short fluctuation) is specified.

As a result, unlike other gaming states, the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to set the game state (that is, the special figure 2 game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the big hit or the small hit is won by the change of the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. In this way, during the latent state, the first special symbol has only a 10-minute fluctuation pattern, and the second special symbol has a 1-second variation pattern, so that the first special symbol will almost certainly change. Can be forcibly stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to have only a 10-minute variation pattern, but a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds or the like) may be executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various game features such as whether or not it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 game.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (c). FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal symbol in the range of "0 to 10", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 by using the acquired value of the normal map variation type counter CS2. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198". Will be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured and set to be variable based on the game state of the normal symbol and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the lower first entry port 64b2 differs depending on the fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 52) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 50) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time saving It has a flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small hit flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

In the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment), balls enter the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (starting prize). It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the above. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry opening 640 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), The values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (starting prize), the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are connected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold is performed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is normally used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Fluctuation display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning of the ball entry port 64b1, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the display effect) up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is a value of each of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing. (Refer to S210 in FIG. 30) or refer to in the second special symbol change start processing (S212 in FIG. 36), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIGS. 48 and S2005).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol. When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol, and when it is off, it is in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. It shows that there is. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S813 in FIG. 34 and S1510 in FIG. 42). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability variation number counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of big hits after the big hit game. In the present embodiment, when the number of big hits reaches three, the normal state is set after the third big hit game is completed, regardless of which big hit type is won. This probability variation number counter 203h is added until the value reaches the upper limit value of 2 after the jackpot game ends (S2704 in FIG. 55), and is reset to 0 when the value reaches the upper limit value of 2 (FIG. 55). S2703). The probability variation counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

In this embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter is added at the end of the big hit, but it may be added at the start of the big hit game. Further, although the upper limit value is set to 2, it is not limited to this, and may be 2 or less or 3 or more. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide various playability.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped when the lottery result is a small hit A (S1604 in FIG. 43), and the special symbol is set to on. It is referred to in the variation processing (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 29). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203i of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 33) that it is set to on (S701: Yes in FIG. 33), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 33).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit game). (Based on the execution), the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol and the variable display of the other special symbol are temporarily stopped. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit (small hit game). It is configured to stop until it finishes) or when it comes off.

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on when the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped when the lottery result is the jackpot B (S832 in FIG. 35), and the special symbol change. It is referred to in the process (see FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S204, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 29). S205). That is, while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203j of the special figure 2 is set to on. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 41) that it is set to on (S1401: Yes in FIG. 41), it is set to off (S1403 in FIG. 41).

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (probability change flag 203 g and time reduction flag 203 m setting status). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203m is set to off, and the probability change state is set when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203m is set to on. It is stored, and the latent probability state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203m is set to off.

Further, in the state where the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, the hit game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed, and the executed big hit game. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The time saving flag 203m is a flag for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and is set to ON when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. The time saving flag 203m is set to ON after the jackpot game is completed, corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S2706 in FIG. 55). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is set to off. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next big hit is won. The configuration is not limited, and for example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit winning), or a predetermined lottery result. When the number of times (for example, a small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, or the number of lottery of each symbol lottery may be When the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned end conditions to be different depending on the winning jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol will continue when the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set.

The jackpot flag 203n has a value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" is set as the jackpot flag 203n for the first special symbol, and "01" is set as the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203n is set as off.

Here, the jackpot flag 203n is configured so that the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol can be discriminated separately. If either one of the second special symbol is set to ON first, even if the lottery result of the other is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON. ..

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), Depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol is used, but the present invention is limited to this. No, a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203n is turned on when one of the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is won. In the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203n set to on, the jackpot may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot A or the jackpot C of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variable display, and is a variable display of the second special symbol. It is set to ON when the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S212 of FIG. 36).

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 53) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29) is the special symbol variation processing (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 29). Is configured to skip.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to be turned on when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203p is set to on when the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and when the special symbol fluctuation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1608 in FIG. 43).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is determined (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S208: Yes in FIG. 29), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S208: Yes in FIG. 29). (See S209 in FIG. 34) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S212: Yes in FIG. 29), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212: Yes in FIG. 29) for stopping the second special symbol being changed ( (See S213 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing to drive the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 50) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the restart variation pattern selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

When the restart variation pattern selection table 222b receives a command indicating the restart of the temporarily stopped special symbol, the "remaining time A", "remaining time B", and "remaining time C" are displayed from the remaining time information storage area from the remaining time. Select a detailed restart variation pattern based on the remaining time stored. As a result, by reselecting the restart fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern that has been temporarily stopped, it is possible to provide a more comfortable game.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (b). As shown in FIG. 20B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, right-handed flag 223j, slave state setting area 223k, special figure 1 provisional A stop flag 223m, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the main control device. When the variation display in the special symbol is executed in 110 and the reserved ball number is subtracted, the voice lamp control device issues a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction. Send to 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is in the latent state and the display reserved ball number command is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number is set in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e. It is controlled to light up and display accordingly. With this configuration, it is possible to convey the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The right-handed flag 223j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more when a jackpot ending command is received. On the other hand, it is set to off when the hold ball number command is received and the value is determined to be 0 during the latent probability state.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to on when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 restart command is issued. Set to off when received.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to on when the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 2 restart command is issued. Set to off when received.

The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of the change of the special symbol that is temporarily stopped. Remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol variation display is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p, and the variation display of the temporarily stopped special symbol is displayed. The remaining period information stored when setting the restart effect when restarting is referred to.

The dash end flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining when the latent probability state is set becomes 0 and the dash mode ends, and the first special symbol is reserved. Set to on when the ball count command is a command indicating 0. On the other hand, it is set to off when the confirmation command of the fluctuation is received.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In FIG. 22, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 22 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 22 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the range of the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 23 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 23B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 24 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 23, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 24 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 24B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 24 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 24 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 23 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) excluding FIG. 24 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 24A to 24B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 24 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and 24 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to (c) and 24 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. It is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display either one or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 26).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, in the example of FIG. 26). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 27) that describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 27) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this definite display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the definite display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 56. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry opening 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 45.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the temporary stop flag 203i in FIG. 1 is set to ON (S202), and then ON. If it is determined that the setting is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to on (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on (S202: No). S204). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S204: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the temporary stop special figure is updated (S205). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the temporary stop flag 203j in FIG. 2 is not on (that is, off), the present process is terminated as it is (S204: No).

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the small hit A. In the present embodiment, while the small hit A game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot B. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not updated while the jackpot B is set, and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during that period. It is configured so that the aspect is not updated.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed with the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the special symbol change during execution disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the lights are repeatedly turned off, or the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, the lights are turned on and off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals). Flashing display mode) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be capable of displaying a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during the temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203r of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S206: Yes), the process of executing the variation of the first special symbol is executed (. S207).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S207), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S207 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S207) is 0 (S208), and S208. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S208: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to the process of S211 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. If it is determined in the processing of S208 that the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S208: No), the processing of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S211.

On the other hand, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (0) (S206: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S210). In this first special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S210), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S208: No) in the process of S208, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S211 to S215) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (0) (S211: No), it means that the special figure 2 is not currently changing. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S212) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S212), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S212), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S212), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203n (or the small hit flag 203p) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S211 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is currently changing in special figure 2 (S211: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S213). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but the processing having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S213) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S214), and if it is determined to be 0 (S214). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S215), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S206 to S210) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S211 to S215) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start processing (S210), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S210).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), S401 is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 11A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a) is used. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 per unit matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol for which the jackpot has been won, in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203n is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is on (S502). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probabilistic state (high probability of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol). The probability change flag 203g is turned on to set the probability change state after the end of the jackpot when it is determined in the process of S2705 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 55) that the winning jackpot type is the jackpot A (S2705: Yes). It is set to. Then, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), since the current gaming state is the normal state, it is acquired from the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1. Based on the first hit type counter CS2, the current jackpot type is determined (S503). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S502 that the time saving flag 203m is on (S502: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the probability variation jackpot type selection table 202d2, The type of jackpot this time is determined (S504). On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203n is off), it is not necessary to determine the big hit type, so the processing of S502 to S504 is skipped. , S505.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type to be won is set to be different based on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, so that the player always enjoys the game while being excited about which jackpot type to win. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot.

After the processing of any of S501, S503, and S504 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S505) and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probable change state) corresponding to the information is read out (S506).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S508).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S509), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S510), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 (S511), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation executing process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change execution processing (S207). In this first special symbol change execution process (S205), a process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and a special interrupted due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol change execution processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, if a small hit is won with one special symbol, the small hit type is small hit A, and the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period. (The period from the winning of the small hit to the end of the small hit game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small hit game of one. Further, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to determine whether the change of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded depending on the winning small hit type, the player wins which small hit type. You can enjoy the game while wondering.

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. ..

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 29 S104) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 milliseconds. (See S205 in FIG. 31) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (1 subtracted) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S207 in FIG. 32). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON in the processing of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined. This is the process that is executed when it has passed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C. (S802). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S812.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, a special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 of FIG. 34), will be described. In this special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), when the process of stopping the change of the first special symbol is executed, when the change result is the jackpot B, the change of the second special symbol is interrupted. Execute the process.

In the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S831). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to suspend (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Since there is no such thing, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S831 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S832). , A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is turned on is set (S833), and this processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the second special symbol is restarted again after the jackpot game is completed. ing. With this configuration, the jackpot type this time can provide a game that is intriguing to the player, whether the change of the second special symbol is interrupted or is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped when the jackpot B is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to temporarily stop when a specific result is obtained. good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of excitement that he / she does not know when the other special symbol will be temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 34, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S802, if it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C (S802: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S806).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S807), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S808, next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is set to ON (S809), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S809 :). Yes), in order to apply the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S807 described above, the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol was turned off. It is set (S810), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S811), and the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, in the process of S809, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S810 and 811 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S812.

In the processing of S812, first, the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol change is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability change flag 203g, and the time saving flag 203m corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off (S812). S813), information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k (S814). The game state storage area 203k is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, latent state) and the game state related to the winning game (big hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S811, the game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S814 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S815), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S816), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S814 is skipped and the above-mentioned S815 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), the process (S812 to S816) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S807). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) ( S405: Yes) in FIG. 31 may be configured so that the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. In the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol to the player. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S212).

When the second special symbol change start process (S212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 29)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), if the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is thereafter. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o set to on, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is turned on without limitation. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S909 Is executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S909, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S210 in FIG. 30) from S301 to S307. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. When the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the process of, and the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. do.

This special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) is a processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but if the lottery result is out of order, the same process as the process of S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation processing (S1009).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), first, is the lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 36)) a small hit? Is determined (S1101).

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that a small hit has been won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). ), Next, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1009 in FIG. 38) executed as one process of the second special symbol change start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), that is, the change of the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203x to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36). The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be described.

When the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is executed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 of FIG. 37).

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. However, for example, a plurality of types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small hit type can be set, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303 are provided. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing of.

After finishing the processing of S1303, the variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 are used for small hits. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) of is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) of the case where the lottery result is out of order is executed. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read (S1307), the variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and the special variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S213). The process for updating the change of the second special symbol is executed, and when the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the change is executed.

In the second special symbol change execution processing (S213), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on (S1401). Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the temporary stop flag 203j is on, that is, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), the special figure 2 for restarting the fluctuation of the second special symbol The restart command is set (S1402), the temporary stop flag 203j of the special figure 2 is set to off (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (S1401: No), since the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to S1404.

After executing the process of S1401 or S1403, next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 33). , The point that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit was changed, the point that the process of setting the flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol was omitted, and the point that the lottery result this time is a big hit When it is determined that the above is not the case (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1514) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508) corresponds to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than a big hit (small hit or miss). The stop process is executed, and the process of canceling (forced stop) the fluctuation of the first special symbol or temporarily stopping is executed according to the winning small hit type.

When the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and when it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON. (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type won this time is small hit A (S1602). When it is determined that the small hit type won this time is small hit A (S1602: Yes), a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1603). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S1604), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is turned on. Special figure 1 Temporary stop command is set (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), since the first special symbol is not changing, the processing of S1604 to S1605 is skipped and the processing of S1607 is performed. Move to.

In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, and the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) when the change of the second special symbol is stopped according to the winning small hit type. ) Or forcibly stop when it comes off. As described above, when the winning small hit type is small hit A, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special figure 1 temporary stop command is sent to the main process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 52). It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in (see). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is provided. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the command is output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the winning small hit type is not A (that is, it is small hit B), the special figure 1 cancellation processing (S1606) is executed, and S1607 Move to processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), which is one of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processes (S1514 in FIG. 43), will be described. In this special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), when the process of stopping the change of the second special symbol is executed, when the change result is the small hit B, the change of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Executes the processing of.

In the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not a value larger than 0 (S1651: No), it is not necessary to forcibly stop the first special symbol, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1651 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1652). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 described later. Then, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the disengagement stop mode is shown to indicate that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been forcibly stopped due to disengagement. Is set for displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and is output to the display control device 114.

Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process proceeds to S1656. In the process of S1656, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 1 is on (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is off (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (S1657), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not on (S1656: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit B is won in the special figure 2 game, the execution special figure 1 fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player during the latent game and spoiling the interest of the game, and it is possible to provide a safe game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol shows a jackpot symbol (big hit symbol) or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. It is configured to stop and display with a missed symbol, but it is not limited to that, and depending on the winning big hit type and small hit type, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or variable display is performed with the measurement of the fluctuation time interrupted. It is composed. With this configuration, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player can perform the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it has not disappeared, and it is possible to play a big hit game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) determines whether or not a ball has entered (starting winning) in any of the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. , Up to the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in total for the upper 1st entrance 64b1 and lower 1st entrance 64b2, maximum 4 for the 2nd entrance 640) when the start prize is won. This is a process of storing the counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the upper first entry opening 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, which is the first starting opening (starting winning). (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. It is determined that the ball has entered the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is acquired (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, is the number of reserved balls for the upper first ball slot 64b1 or the lower first ball slot 64b2 less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, is the number of reserved balls stored up to the upper limit? ) Is determined. When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the ball has not entered the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (S1701: No), or in the processing of S1703, the upper first ball is at present. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the 1 incoming ball opening 64b1 or the lower 1st incoming ball opening 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is skipped and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit and the ball is inserted into the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, added value can be added. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit and the ball enters the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, the motivation for playing is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Next, for each process from S1708 to S1714, the ball wins the first starting port (upper first ball entry port 64b1 or lower first ball entry port 64b2) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. Since the same processing as the processing performed on the second ball entry port 640 is different only in that the processing is performed on the second entrance 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 46), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit A first winning command indicating the winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of order in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the omission is set. (S1825), this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail determination. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the second look-ahead process (S1714). In the second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 47), the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46) causes a ball to enter the first starting port (upper first entry port 64b1 or lower first entry port 64b2). While the process is to determine (look ahead) the pending data (winning information) based on the ball (starting prize) in advance and make various judgments, the target to be judged is the starting prize at the first starting opening. The only difference is that the winning information based on the above is changed to the winning information based on the start winning at the second starting opening (second entrance 640), and the other details are the same because the same processing is executed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used. The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to on. (S2008: Yes) acquires a hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11 (c)) for high probability, and proceeds to the process of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S2008: No), the hit / fail determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the lower first entry port 64b2 differs depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) defines a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds (usually). The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2, so that ball. Is configured so that the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a different fluctuation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f). When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified as 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified. A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2 (through gate 67). Since the normal symbol fluctuation (30 second fluctuation) is being executed (1.6 seconds after passing), the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the lower first entry port 64b2. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2 ( Since the game is executed per normal figure (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 according to the length of the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the lower first entry opening 64b2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S2015), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high probability state of the above is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 64a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 64a is long open (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a. As a result, the electric accessory 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, when it is determined whether the time saving flag 203m is on (S2018) and the time saving flag 203m is not on (off), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No), as an opening pattern for a low-probability state of a normal symbol, an opening pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes opening for 0.7 seconds once is set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , It is configured to open the electric accessory 64a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (lower). The period in which the first ball entry port 64b2 is open is longer).

Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 64a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 64a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 64a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a may be set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2002: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103). , S2106.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a latent probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating a firing abnormality is made. A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. can.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into a right-handed region. May be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2103 to S2105, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2107).

If it is determined in the process of S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a normal symbol holding ball number counter (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is normal. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S2312 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 52), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 29) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 52), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 is executed (S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In this jackpot control process (S2404), the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 65 are used for each round of the jackpot state. The device 650 (hereinafter referred to as a winning opening, etc.) has been opened, and the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65) has elapsed. , Right variable winning device 650) determines whether a specified number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning openings and the like (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning openings and the like (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the small hit control process related to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small hit control process (S2405), the period for opening the V winning opening 650a and the period for closing the V winning opening 650a are set in advance for the right variable winning device 650 which is opened during the small hit game (S2405). The process for setting based on the small hit scenario) is executed. The detailed contents of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) is completed. In addition, the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 34). In the display mode set in S507 of (see), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (disengaged symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401 and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2409, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2415), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If so, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 54, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, and switching). The operation process of the member 650h) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53), will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is used for a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is executed for a first attacker (right variable winning device 650) and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) as a jackpot game. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation, and the above-mentioned processing of S2642 is performed among the round games that open the first attacker (right variable winning device 650). It is specified only in the open operation scenario corresponding to the round game of the first round. Therefore, when executing other round games, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k is opened in the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not specified, so the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 55), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 (S2506). When it is determined that the operation timing is set (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round (the second round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2512), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2511), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), the value of the probability variation counter is updated, the high probability state of the special symbol is set according to the winning jackpot type, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set based on the winning jackpot type. Is executed.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is 3 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the probability change number counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), the probability change number is the upper limit of 3, so the probability change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m are set to off (S2702), and the probability change is changed. The value of the count counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the probability change state or the latent probability state is set up to 3 times after the end of the big hit game, and the game state becomes the normal state when the number of times reaches 3 times. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can change the probability up to 3 times or enjoy the latent probability game with peace of mind. In the present embodiment, the number of probable changes is set to 3 times, but the number is not limited to this, and may be set to 5 times or updated randomly. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a wide variety of playability.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2701 that the value of the probability variation counter 203h is not 3 (that is, 2 or less), it is not the timing when the probability variation ends, so the value of the probability variation counter 203h is added by 1. (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type won this time is A (S2705). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is A (S2705: Yes), in order to set the probability change state as the game state, the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), and the above-mentioned S2709 Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S2707) and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on in order to set the latent probability state as the game state (S2707). S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S2405). This small hit control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and is for executing various effects according to the small hit when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of the special symbol. It is a process for setting information (command) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process (S2405), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the small hit (S2801). If it is the timing to start the small hit (S2801: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2802), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the small hit (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S2803). When it is determined that the player is not in the small hit (S2803: Yes), it is not necessary to execute the control for the small hit, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the opening operation of the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). When it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the release solenoid is set to be turned on (S2805), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to off (S2807), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 58). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), then , Interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main controller 110? Determine (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing is terminated. ..

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the winning game state (high hit, small hit) in the secondary state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4214), and this processing is terminated. A detailed description of this variable stop processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the variation effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is executed as the period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the above, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to stop the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in accordance with the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation status of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect status displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the variable stop-related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4215), and the temporary stop-related command has been received. If it is determined (S4215: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. The process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute is performed.

In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received (S4217), and it is determined that the hit related command has been received. (S4217: Yes) executes the hit-related process (S4218), and ends this process. The details of the hit-related process (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 30). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the latent probability state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a variation effect corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in a state where it is determined that the command has been performed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 side executes the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination and the fluctuation pattern setting, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 On the side, the process of determining the current gaming state is executed first, and then the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described.

Special figure 1 When the fluctuation start processing is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4304: No), the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable state, which is a special feature. FIG. 1 A display command indicating a main fluctuation pattern is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the game state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (of the first special symbol). (Because the variation display is a slave game state), a display command indicating the slave variation pattern in Special Figure 1 is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) is set, first. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S). S4353).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4354). If it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4354: No), the variable display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state. FIG. 2 A display command indicating a slave variation pattern is set (S4355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (variation display of the first special symbol). (Because is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 2 is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination processing (S4151 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number processing (S4208). In this reserved ball number processing (S4208), a process for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed when the gaming state is the latent state.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S4501). The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is latent (S4503). If it is determined that the game is not in latent state (normal state or probable change state) (S4503: No), other processes related to the reserved ball are executed (S4509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state is latent (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504). This right-handed flag 223j is set to ON in the jackpot-related processing (S5002) in the hit-related processing (S4218), and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is set during the ending of the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. This is a flag for setting a dash mode that prompts the player to play a right-handed game when it is determined that there is. If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the right-handed flag 223j is not on (S4504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), the dash end flag 223q is set to ON (S4506) because it is the timing of the end of the dash mode, and the right-handed flag 223j. Is set to off (S4507), other processes related to the reserved ball are executed (S4508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of first special symbol reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processing is executed (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the latent state is reached, the player is notified that there is a reserved ball in the first special symbol by using the dash mode, but depending on the state of the first special symbol, the player is notified. Special Figure 2 The execution of the game may be emphasized and displayed. Specifically, the display mode of the right-handed display may be changed according to the game state or the lottery result, such as when the first special symbol is non-variable, out-of-change fluctuation, or jackpot fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the special figure 2 game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4212). This state command process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the first according to the set gaming state. 3 The process for setting different display modes displayed on the symbol display device 81 is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described.

When the state command process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discriminating means for discriminating the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discriminant result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is If it is determined whether the game is in the latent state (S4605), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in the latent state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. The main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and the display command indicating the super mode is set (S4607). The process proceeds to the processing of S4610.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the latent state), that is, when the state command indicating the probable change state is received. (S4605: No) sets the main display area setting command corresponding to the probability change state (S4608), sets the display command indicating the challenge mode (S4609), and proceeds to the process of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a fluctuation stop process (S4214), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4214). This variable stop processing (S4214) sets a display mode when a variable stop related command (a command set when the stop is displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main control device 110. The process for doing this is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S215 in FIG. 42) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 42).

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the super mode is being executed). Then (S4702), if it is determined that the state is latent (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for stopping the follow-up fluctuation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the state is not latent (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. Further, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4705.

Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 2 variable stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main controller 110. (See S806 in FIG. 34).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the super mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is latent (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the state is not latent (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to the process of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a determination-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the determination-related process (S4216). In this confirmation-related process (S4216), when the confirmation command of the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the dash mode, and the process of ending the dash mode is executed.

In the confirmation-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command from the main control device 110, it determines whether or not it is the end timing of the dash mode. When it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of the dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set to off (S4753), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the dash end flag 223q is not on (S4751: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4218). In this temporary stop-related process (S4218), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure variation time when the temporary stop command is received and an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the 1 variation restart command is received. The process of setting (additional effect) is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4218) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop command is executed. The stop flag 223m is set to ON (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time calculated by the process of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804), and if it is determined to be less than 5 seconds (S4804: Yes), the residual variation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. The remaining period A indicating that is short is set (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4804, when it is determined that the residual variation time is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or more) (S4804: No), then the residual variation period is 5 seconds or more and more than 60 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4806), and if it is 5 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), the period B indicating that the remaining time is the normal remaining fluctuation time is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p. It is set (S4807), and the process proceeds to S4809.

On the other hand, in the process of S4806, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808). , S4809. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is different according to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed. However, the selection ratio of each period information is not limited to this, for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. May be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. You may.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining fluctuation time, and the remaining fluctuation. It can provide the fun of predicting time.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the process of changing the target of the above-mentioned processes of S4802 to S4808 from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is executed (S4810 to). S4816), the process proceeds to S4817. After executing any of the processes of S4813, S4815, and S4816, or when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4809 (S4809: No), the restart process (S4817) is performed. Execute and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the restart process (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4817). This restart process (S4817) executes a process of setting an effect to be executed when the special figure 1 restart command is received.

When the restart process (S4817) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is off (S4901: No). , End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S4902), and the special figure 1 If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), then the temporary stop flag in Special Figure 1 is set to off (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read out. (S4904), a variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process proceeds to S4908. On the other hand, even when it is determined in the process of S4902 that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4908.

In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4908, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 restart command has been received (S4909), and the special figure 2 When it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4909: Yes), then the temporary stop flag of Special Figure 2 is set to off (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read out. (S4911), a variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display for the player. Further, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4220). In this hit-related process (S4220), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. The process of setting the prize ball number command for display based on the result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot-related process (S5002), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S5001 in FIG. 69) is the jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of S5105 (S5105: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5106.

In the process of S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is smaller than 1 (that is, at 0). If it is determined (S5106: No), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right-handed flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), and the dash is included. Set the ending command (S5109), and then end this process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a small hit-related command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S5003: Yes), the small hit related process (S5004) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a small hit-related process (S5004), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S5004). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is the small hit start command (S5201). If it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S5202), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5203: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5204), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), then it is determined whether or not the prize ball command is received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5005: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5005: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S5006). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S5007), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period until the normal state or the probable change state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) (advantageous continuation period). It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received in the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) or in the latent state.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the time when the latent state is set until the normal state (probable change state) is set again. It can be notified.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning game state (medium big hit, medium small hit) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to provide means. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit, small hit) which is advantageous to the player. , Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is configured to continue, and the small hit game is performed during the latent probability state. It is configured to be easy to break (easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery). Therefore, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again during the advantageous continuation period, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. Will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is based on the jackpot winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10 and the small hit winning probability. It is preferable to configure it so as to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are awarded. And because the actual small hit winning probability is higher than the preset small hit winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are won. The case where it is possible and the case where it can be analyzed can be analyzed so that the player can distinguish it. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and facilitate the continuous game.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of hamari) executed up to that time has exceeded the predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed, or it may be executed during the small hit winning. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of times of lottery of special figure 2) exceeds a predetermined number of times (10 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5305 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Based on the variation pattern related to the effect, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set (S5303), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5304), and the first 2 The process shifts to the process of S5305 for setting the variable display regarding the special symbol (special figure 2).

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 58) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113. To. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 of FIG. 72 will be described. The processing of S5305 to S5308 differs from the processing of S5301 to S5304 of FIG. 72 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

When the processing of S5305 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5305), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5305: No), the processing of S5309 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that it is set to on (S5305: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5306), and the second is based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5308), and the process proceeds to 5309.

In the process of S5309, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5309), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to on (S5309). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to on (S5309: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5310), and the extracted stop type is set. Is set as it is (S5311), a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for display is set (S5312), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit winning or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, latent state) is set, the second special symbol is set. The lottery is configured to be easy to be executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

Further, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is also set. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. It is configured to be done.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. The second special symbol is set so that it is difficult to win a big hit in the state where the normal state is set.

In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device, which is special after the jackpot game is completed. It may be configured so that a high probability state of a symbol is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, latent state, and probabilistic state) can be set as gaming states, but four game states (normal state, latent state) that can be set can be set. , Probability change state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) may be set, or two or less may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a small hit, is a specific gaming state. It is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), but other configurations may be used. For example, the first ball entry port 64 is provided in the left side region, and the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side region. It is the most advantageous game for the player to provide the attached first entrance and the second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is not attached and to perform the right-handed game when the probability change state is set. It may be configured in.

In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to set, and the latent state is in the latent state. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variable stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forced disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 65), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands other than display commands, audio output commands, and accessory drive commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device with the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 82. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the starting prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<About the modified example of the first embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery is performed. By forcibly stopping the first special symbol that is changing in the display mode indicated by the deviation, or by configuring the subtraction of the fluctuation time to be temporarily interrupted (until the small hit game is completed), the second special symbol Although it is configured so that the lottery can be easily executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used.

The jackpot probability of the special symbol is always constant regardless of the game state, and the first entrance, which triggers the fluctuation of the first special symbol, is placed at a position where the left-handed game ball can enter, and the right-handed ball is hit. The right first entry slot corresponding to the first special symbol and the right second entry slot corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in the area where the game ball can be entered, and the right second entry slot is arranged. An electric motor that makes it easier to enter the mouth than in the closed state by opening the game ball to the right second entrance when the game ball passes through the through gate through which the right-handed game ball can pass. Arrange and configure the accessory.

In the normal game state (low probability, non-electric support (probability of normal symbol is low probability)), the game ball is inserted into the first entrance where the game is played by left-handed, and the first special symbol Let the lottery be played. The lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the probability of the normal symbol becomes high after the big hit game, and when the electric accessory is in a short-time game state (game state with electric support) where the electric accessory is likely to be open, the game is played by hitting right. By performing, it becomes possible to play a game by inserting a game ball into the right first entrance and the right second entrance, and the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed at the same time. It will be possible to be done. In the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and a small hit game is executed in which the V winning device formed in the variable winning device in the V winning area is opened. It is configured to be easy to do. Further, when the small hit B (small hit A and small hit B are set) is executed, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly terminated (forcibly set in the judgment result of deviation). Has been done.

Here, in the modified example, the jackpot game executed by the game ball passing through the V winning area by the small hit game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is set with a big hit. Here, in the jackpot executed by the game ball passing through the V winning area, the selection ratio of the jackpot in which the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game is set higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. By setting the number of rounds to be larger than the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot executed through the V winning area may be configured to be advantageous.

In this way, even in a so-called one-kind and two-kind mixed gaming machine, one special symbol in which the jackpot fluctuation that is disadvantageous to the player is executed is based on the small hit or jackpot of the other special symbol. By forcibly stopping by coming off, it is possible to easily give a jackpot advantageous to the player.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. In the second embodiment, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from those of the first embodiment. It's different.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the winning big hit type. Specifically, the jackpot A, which is won only by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), is set to the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C are set to the latent state after the jackpot game is finished. Will be done. The jackpot D that is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, as described above, the first embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ), And if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is discarded (forced stop due to loss) or interrupted (temporary stop) according to the small hit type. It is configured to do.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of the winning jackpot type, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Further, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set as the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and the small hit game (small hit RUSH) is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where a probability change state is set, the jackpot fluctuation starts from the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)), and either of them. The latent state is set in the period until the jackpot game of the special symbol of is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol change of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol change time of the special figure 1 is interrupted (temporarily stopped) or stopped during the period when the small hit game is being executed. , It is configured to be discarded (forced stop when it comes off). In addition, in the second embodiment, different fluctuation times are easily set according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Therefore, depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, there is a possibility that the jackpot fluctuation cannot be interrupted or discarded due to the small hit of the second special symbol. As a result, the player wants to set a long period as the period in which the latent state is set, and therefore wants to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation period.

As shown with reference to FIG. 88, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, a screen for notifying the player that the game state is in the probability change state (challenge mode) at the ending of the jackpot is displayed. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88 (a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 89 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 89A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 89A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, the comment "Challenge mode entry !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set.

Further, in the small display area Dm1, "555" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed. Then, in the small display area Dm1a and the small display area Dm2a, "0" indicating that there is no reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, respectively.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probabilistic state is set as the game state (see FIG. 88 (b)), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probabilistic state. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (b) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic change state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic change state is stored. ), The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 90 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state is changed at the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)) at which the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probability change state. It is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 816 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped and displayed. .. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed from the probable state to the latent state because the effect symbol 816 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the second embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as a display mode of. Then, a comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Since it is configured to be displayed, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 90 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (b). FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 90 (b), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set (in RUSH), the small display area Dm1 is changing. 1 "541" indicating a display mode for suggesting that the fluctuation of the special symbol has been discarded (forced stop due to disengagement) is displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates that a small hit has been won. The display mode "246" is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm7, "V × 3" indicating that the small hit has been won three times is displayed as a display mode indicating the cumulative number of small hits, and in the small display area Dm8, this latent state is displayed. The elapsed time "01:50 (1 minute 50 seconds)" since the setting of is displayed.

Then, the treasure box 817 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 818 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In addition, a star mark 819 is displayed around the staging pattern 818. The star mark 819 is a display mode indicating that the jackpot fluctuation, in which the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, is forcibly stopped by the small hit winning this time. With this configuration, the player can get a sense of relief and can concentrate more on the right-handed game.

In the second embodiment, the star mark 819 is displayed to show the change result of the first special symbol, but the effect is not limited to this, and the effect symbol is shown to show the change result of the first special symbol. The 818 may be displayed to be variable. Further, not only the fluctuation result but also the remaining fluctuation period of the discarded first special symbol may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.

Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner during the latent state, the effect content is variably displayed depending on the state of the first special symbol being non-variable, out-of-order fluctuation, jackpot fluctuation, or the like. You may. For example, the color of the "right-handed" guidance display in the small display area Dm3 may be changed or blinked. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the second embodiment, the right second variable winning device 650, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right area, and the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state is used. It is configured so that you can play games. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. In the state where the certain state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 90 (a). ))reference. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also set in the state where the probability variation state is set. Both of the second special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 90 (a)), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and the problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state occurs. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (change). The presence / absence, the remaining fluctuation period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 91, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 88, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 88), the probability change A "super challenge mode" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "challenge mode" for indicating the state.

When the "super challenge mode" is set, a comment indicating that the sub display area Ds is the "super challenge mode" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 89 (b), and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 816.

Then, in the small display area Dm1, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, before the latent state is set. The "variation display mode" that is changing from the time point is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super challenge mode" shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 variation is completed (see FIG. 88 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered the "RUSH" via the "super challenge mode" will be described. FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super challenge mode”. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 817, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "435" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (RUSH), that is, during the latent state, a game is executed in which the second special symbol lottery in which the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set by performing the right-handed game is frequently performed. ..

Therefore, during the rush game, the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2, and the change of the first special symbol can be interrupted or discarded by the small hit game. However, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a short fluctuation pattern is selected, the jackpot fluctuation is discarded by the small hit. Can not do it. As a result, the player can prevent the player from winning the unfavorable jackpot in the rush game, and can execute the rush game while wondering whether or not he / she can win the most advantageous jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / latency table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability variation / latency table 202ad2 has the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability variation / latency table 202d (see FIG. 14A) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are specified, and the setting contents of the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are specified for each jackpot type.

The difference is that the game states of the jackpot B and the jackpot C of the probability variation / latent probability table 202ad2 of the first embodiment described above are set after the jackpot game is completed. Specifically, the jackpot B and the jackpot C are configured so that the time saving flag 203m is set to off and the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed. In the second embodiment, the time saving flag 203m is set to ON. That is, in the second embodiment, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won when the probability variation state or the latent probability state is set, after the jackpot game ends, after the jackpot game ends regardless of the jackpot type. The probability change state is set.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time reduction / probability variation table 202ae2 has a variation pattern length corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202e2 (see FIG. 17A) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it makes the difference. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit A", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159". Short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds are associated with and defined, and middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "160 to 196", and fluctuations are specified in the range of "197 to 198". Long fluctuations with a time of 600 seconds are specified in association with each other.

In the second embodiment, as described above, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability change state, the latent state is set as the game state and the right-handed game is executed. Then, if the "big hit A" is won during the probability change state, the short fluctuation (0.1 seconds) is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern, and even if the special figure 2 game is executed in a hurry, it is almost certainly the first. You will win a big hit with a special design. Therefore, the jackpot A is the jackpot that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit B", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 4" and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are specified in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "5-41", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds correspond to the range of "42 to 198". It is specified with.

The jackpot B is configured so that middle fluctuation is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern. And, as described above, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (see FIG. 17 (b)), the small hit is won rather than the big hit A. It is a big hit that is easy to discard.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit C", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 1" and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are specified in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "2 to 5", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds correspond to the range of "6 to 198". It is specified with.

As described above, when the jackpot C is won, the long fluctuation of 600 seconds is easily executed as the fluctuation pattern. During a long fluctuation of 600 seconds, a 1-second fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol will win a small hit with a probability of 1/2, so it is possible to reliably discard this jackpot, and it is the easiest jackpot to discard. It is a type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the game of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in the first embodiment described above, when the game state is in the probable change state, when the jackpot change is started in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game shifts to the 100% probable state. The difference is that if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic / latent state, the 100% probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot. Since the flow of other games is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences between. The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment described above in that the latent probability state can be set from the probable change state as the gaming state at the start of the change of the first special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S231) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S231). The first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is executed and then the game state update process (S332) is executed. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above. In the case of, the difference is that the process of setting the gaming state to the latent state is executed, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after the lottery result of this time is acquired by the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is ON (S451). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is on (S451: Yes), the off-design symbol is set in the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S451 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203n is not on (S451: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the above-mentioned processes S406 to S408 are executed, then the time saving flag 203 m is set to off (S452), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the game state update process (S332), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol change start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process (S332). This game state update process (S332) executes a process of updating the game state at the start of the change of the first special symbol and setting a command to be sent to the voice lamp control device.

In the game state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on (S651). If it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S651: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (S6511: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S652). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S232) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S232). The first special symbol change stop process 2 (S232) does not execute the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) for the first special symbol change stop process (S209 in FIG. 34), and the special figure 2 is a big hit. The difference is that the process of discarding (S809 to S811) is not executed. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551). The jackpot end process 2 (S2551) wins one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C when the gaming state is a latent state with respect to the jackpot end process (S2512) of the first embodiment described above. Then, the process of setting the probability change state is executed, which is different. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot end process 2 (S2551), after executing the above-mentioned processes S2701 to S2704, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (S2751). When it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is D (S2752). When the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S2753) and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on in order to set the latent state in the game state (S2753). S2754), a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not D (S2752: No), the time saving flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are set to ON in order to set the probability variation state in the game state (S2706), and described above. The process of S2709 is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the same as the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a fluctuation stop process (S4214 of FIG. 65) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the fluctuation stop process 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead of (see). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251), for the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the latent state, it is for display corresponding to the current lottery result. The difference is that a process for setting a command (S4751) is added. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been forcibly stopped in an easy-to-understand manner. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, the gaming state is a probabilistic state, and if a jackpot is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the probabilistic change state, the time is shortened at the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the jackpot fluctuation). By setting the flag 203m to off, the latent probability state is set, and the small hit RUSH that executes the small hit game until the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed is set.

In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won and the latent probability state is set, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. Then, by winning the small hit of the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol or forcibly stop it by the deviation, until the big hit of the second special symbol is won. Or, it is configured so that the latent state is set until the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be discarded and the fluctuation is stopped.

In addition to such a configuration, a probability variation end condition and a latent probability end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2, the number of small hit executions, etc.) are set, and when the conditions are satisfied, It may be configured to end the latent state and shift to the normal state. In addition, the end condition (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the latent end condition) is notified to the player, the player determines the game situation, and the special figure 2 game to the special figure 1 game (left-handed). It may be configured to switch to the game). With such a configuration, various playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 112. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, the small hit is configured to be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol, and when a specific small hit (small hit A) is won (the special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating the small hit). (When stopped and displayed), the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped in a display mode that indicates a deviation, and when another small hit (small hit B) is won, the change of the first special symbol that is changing It was configured to interrupt the time subtraction.

Then, when the latent state is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the small hit winnings are frequently generated during the latent state, so that the player can win the prize. It was configured so that a prize ball could be given. Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot game is configured so as to easily shift to the latent state after the big hit game is executed, and the number of times the latent state is set (big hit). An upper limit was set for the number of winnings), and when the upper limit was reached, the normal state was set regardless of the type of jackpot won.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the small hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and when one of the special symbols wins the small hit (special). (When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit), the change of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation. It is configured in.

With this configuration, it is possible to forcibly remove the other special symbol change by drawing any special symbol. Further, since the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the small hit winning of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the jackpot game can be prevented from being executed.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a specific gaming state (for example, a latent state) is set, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed. However, when a specific gaming state is set, the control of forcibly stopping one big hit fluctuation by the other small hit winning is configured to be executed mutually. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific gaming state from ending due to the jackpot winning, and to continue the latent state for a long period of time.

In addition, in the third embodiment, there are a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables referred to when setting fluctuation patterns of each special symbol, and the fluctuation patterns specified in each fluctuation pattern table are different. .. Specifically, the length of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when the big hit is won and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when the small hit is won are different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the probability that the big hit game is actually executed even if the probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the small hit are the same. can. For example, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily set is referred to as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, a jackpot fluctuation of 10 minutes is referred to as one of the special symbol fluctuations. When executed, it becomes possible to execute a large number of other special symbol lottery during the special symbol change. Then, by winning a small hit in the other special symbol lottery, the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that the jackpot game of the special symbol becomes difficult to be performed. Similarly, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is easily set is referred to as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, it is executed during the special symbol fluctuation. Since the number of lottery for the other special symbol is reduced, the jackpot game of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small hit variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) as in the variation pattern set as the above-mentioned jackpot variation. By setting a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation, it is possible to facilitate the big hit game.

Further, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is set as the game state, the game state is advantageous to the player in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Once the latent state is set, the latent state is configured so that the latent state does not end unless the jackpot game of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, by winning a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol and suppressing the execution of the big hit game, it is possible to play the game in the latent state for a long period of time.

In this way, by forcibly stopping (disengaging) the big hit fluctuation of one special symbol by the small hit winning of the other special symbol, it is possible to use the playability to continue the latent state advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game (a game in which a lottery of a special symbol that is not during the jackpot fluctuation) is performed even during the jackpot fluctuation, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a display mode for indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the small hit forcibly stops the player from coming off. The actual lottery result of the symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation can be suggested to the player in a feasible manner.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, the variation pattern command for display to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set. , A variation information storage means for temporarily storing variation information (lottery result of special symbol, variation time, etc.) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is provided, and then the special symbol being changed is forced. Of the commands for forcibly stopping off (variable stop command), when a command for forcibly stopping the special symbol that is changing based on the small hit winning (small hit time fluctuation stop command) is received. , Stop fluctuation information based on the fluctuation information stored in the fluctuation information storage means, together with a display command for forcibly stopping and displaying the changing special symbol on the display control device 114 in a display mode indicating disconnection. Set the display command to suggest.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command for suggesting the stop fluctuation information, for example, the effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big hit, the character of the monster is displayed, and if it is a small hit, the design of the treasure box is displayed. In addition, the color of the monster character is displayed so as to be variable depending on the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how many times the end of the gaming state of the latent probability change can be avoided by making a small hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to suggest the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time even at the timing of displaying the display mode (“V symbol”) indicating the small hit winning. However, the timing of the suggestion display is not limited to this, for example, the timing at which the small hit game is started, the small hit game is in progress, or the small hit game is completed. It may be configured to be performed at the timing. In addition, a fusion display in which a suggestion display and a display for showing a small hit winning may be performed may be executed, or game information for showing a small hit game result (for example, the number of prize balls and the latent state) may be executed. The number of small hit games executed during the game) and the suggestion display may be fused.

Further, the above-mentioned suggestion display may be set so that it is easier to execute when the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has won the jackpot than when the jackpot has not been won. As a result, even if the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has not won the big hit, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit has been won at a good timing.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won, the changing special symbol may be forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped by this small hit. It is good to set the display mode of.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, only the first ball entry port 64b1 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is on the right. The first ball entry port 64b2 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side thereof, a first variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big hit game and a small one on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. A second variable winning device 650, which is opened during a winning game, is arranged.

Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a distribution flow path capable of distributing and guiding the game ball to the right first entry port 64b2 and the second entry port 640 is formed. At the upper part of the distribution flow path, it is launched by right-handed (a game method in which the player launches the game ball with a firing strength capable of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the third symbol display device 81). A rotary distribution member 700 capable of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 is arranged.

The rotary distribution member 700 is formed with a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion that can accept the game ball, respectively, and the rotary distribution member 700 rotates to form a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. It is configured so that the parts alternately face diagonally upward to the left. The rotary distribution member 700 is configured to rotate by about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and the game is hit right with the first receiving portion facing diagonally upward to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101). When the ball enters the first receiving portion, the rotary distribution member 700 rotates 90 degrees to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and distributes (guides) the game ball to the first flow path 701. When the game ball is distributed to the first flow path 7901 by the rotary distribution member 700, the rotary distribution member 700 is stopped with the second receiving portion facing diagonally upward to the left. Next, the game ball hit to the right enters the second receiving portion, and the rotary distribution member 700 rotates to the right due to the weight of the entered game ball, and the second flow path The game ball in the second receiving section is distributed (guided) to 702.

In this way, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the rotary distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the bending path 701a, passes through the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640, and flows out to the lower part of the right side region. Further, the sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back surface side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 101). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side from the viewpoint), and flows out from the outlet 704c to the lower side of the right side region on the game board 13.

Then, the spheres distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 merge in the lower right region, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 It flows down and flows into the out port 66.

Since the rotary distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls launched by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are launched in one minute, the first flow 50 pieces are distributed to the road 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces are distributed to the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) equivalent to one ball, and the bending path 701a provided in the middle of the first flow path 701 reduces the flow speed of the ball. The ball passing time until the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

In the third embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged in the first flow path 701, and the second ball entry port 640 is arranged in the second flow path 702. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entry port 640.

In the game board 13, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream portion of the first flow path 701, and when the constantly movable member 1500 is movable in the open position (open). (In the case of the state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first entry port 64b.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 (see FIG. 101) of the third embodiment, the balls launched in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the constantly movable member 1500 is arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the provided rolling surface. When this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened is matched. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the constantly movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance slot 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is performed. It is possible to prevent the state in which the special figure 1 is not held from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period in which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball is entered in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 fired balls enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots can enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entrance 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be put into the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed ball is hit more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game in a time-saving state or a big hit state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 will be described focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment. do.

A through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream part of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701a, and a second entry port 640 is arranged in the downstream part of the second flow path 702 (the lower end part of the fifth flow path 704b). is doing. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly inserted into the second entry port 640. Can be entered into.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port is used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert the ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

A case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side region in one minute, the ball that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the ball that is fired next to the ball, and is fired next to the second flow path 702. The ball flowing into the ball flows down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost at the same time (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at one time.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths overlap each other when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area occupied by the ball flow paths of the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second entry port 640), and is the first in the lower right region of the game board 13. The sphere is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the sphere that has flowed out from the flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that flowed out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the spheres that flowed out at a higher speed than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the spheres that flowed out from the first flow path 701 and were irregular. It is possible to suppress the situation where a ball flow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the rotary distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used, for example, 2 Instead of alternating (1: 1) with one flow path, the spheres may be distributed at different ratios, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, a distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passing ball. For example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A dividing member may be used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110. It should be noted that only the differences from the first embodiment will be illustrated and described, and the illustration and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment has a migration destination selection table 202ba added to the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and the small hit random number table 202b is added to the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. The second hit random number table 202c is changed to the second hit random number 3 table 202bc, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202f is changed to the normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small hit type selection table 202g is changed to the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, the lottery for the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit. Specifically, if the value of the acquired first random number counter is in the range of "112 to 116", it is configured to be a small hit.

Next, the second random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, even when the probability of the normal symbol is low (normal state, latent state), the player is configured to win the prize by almost hitting the normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 230", it is configured to be a normal symbol hit.

Next, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is also configured to win a small hit. Then, if the value of the small hit type counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", "small hit B" is set. Will be done. Since the content of the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

Then, when the small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped depending on the small hit type, as in the case where the small hit is won in the second special symbol. It is configured as follows. Specifically, if "Small hit A" is won, the second special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, and if it is "Small hit B", the change of the second special symbol is out of order. It is configured to be forcibly stopped. In the third embodiment, the same small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) is used regardless of whether the small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2. ) Are selected at the same ratio (50% each), but the selection ratio for each small hit type may be set as appropriate. If the winning is won, the small hit B may be selected at a higher rate than the case where the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in which the probability of winning the small hit is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of discarding the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1. Further, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, only the small hit B may be set, or it is set when the small hit is won or when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to change the ratio of the small hit type selected according to the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the normal figure variation pattern 3 table 202bf will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the fluctuation time is shortened even when the probability of the normal symbol is low. Specifically, it is configured so that the fluctuation time is 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) at the time of low probability of the normal symbol. With this configuration, it becomes more variable and the chances of drawing lots for ordinary symbols increase. Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, it is configured so that it is easy to win a hit of a normal symbol even when the probability of the normal symbol is low. As a result, even in the latent state, the ball can easily enter the right first entry port 64b2.

Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. The migration destination selection table 202ba is a type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern determined after the small hit game when a small hit is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of migrations thereof. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times (the number of times of execution of the determination game (lottery of a special symbol) which selects a variation pattern from the transitioned variation pattern selection table).

FIG. 105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The migration 1 table 202ba1 (see FIG. 107) and the migration 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) are set in the migration destination table 202ba, and the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba is set. 202ba2 is configured to be set.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing in detail the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The game state is divided into a case where the game state is a latent state (a non-electric support game state in a high-probability game state) and a case where the game state is a game state other than the latent game state (others), and the current game state. If is in a gaming state other than the latent probability gaming state, the migration destination table is not set, and the variation pattern is set from the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) currently set. ing.

On the other hand, in the case of the latent game state, the migration destination table and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern from the migration destination table (specified number after migration) based on the acquired values of the migration counter 203ba, respectively. Are set respectively. Specifically, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "0 to 90", the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected), and 10 times is set (selected) as the specified number after migration. .. When the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "91 to 98", the migration 1 table ba1 is set, and the specified number after migration is set to 3 times. When the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "99", the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, and 100 times is set as the specified number after migration.

In this way, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set as the variation pattern selection table 202e used after the small hit game when the small hit is won only in the latent game state. There is. With this configuration, it is not a left-handed game (a game method in which a player launches a game ball with a firing strength at which the game ball flows down the left flow path of the third symbol display device 81), but a right-handed game. Only in the latent game state, which is the game state in which the game is played, the small hit game can be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern using a specific fluctuation pattern selection table for a predetermined number of times.

Here, in the normal game state (game state without low probability electric support) and the probabilistic game state (game state with high probability electric support), 10 minutes is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Also, since the winning rate to the right first ball entrance 64b2 is configured to be lower than that when hitting the left, the player can hit the left and play the game to the left first ball opening 64b1. It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by inserting the ball. Although not shown in the present embodiment, the setting of the determination value of the second random number table 202c has been changed, and the determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability is "0 to 230". Is set, and "0 to 231" is set as a random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability time, and the difference between low probability time and high probability time is reduced. Further, the set value of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f has also been changed, and both the normal map low accuracy and the normal map high accuracy are set to 500 ms. With this configuration, it is electric regardless of whether it is in a gaming state with electric support (high-probability gaming state in the normal figure) or in a non-electric support gaming state (low-probability gaming state in the normal figure). The accessory is set in a state where it is easy to open, and the game ball is configured to be easier to enter into the second entry port 640 than the left first entry opening 64b1.

However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is remarkably long in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, the right-handed game ball can be configured to be disadvantageous to the player. , You can make the game play by left-handed game. Further, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, so that it is configured to be advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting right (see FIG. 17 (b)). ). On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG. 17 (b), and is configured to suppress the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the third embodiment, in the latent game state, the right-handed game is possible (the fluctuation time is set short and possible), and the lottery with the second special symbol is performed, so that it becomes easy to win a small hit. In the small hit game, since the open game of the 2R second variable winning device 650 is performed, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 win the game ball, and the prize ball for the winning is paid out to the player. This allows the player to have more balls. Therefore, the longer the period of the latent game state is set, the more chances of winning a small hit (number of winnings) can be increased.

Here, if the jackpot A in the first special symbol is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic game state (high probability, game state with electric support), so that the game state is left-handed. It is configured to be set so that a gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute a small hit game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent probability gaming state is set.

However, in the third embodiment, in the case of the small hit B, the lottery result is forcibly deviated from the change of the first special symbol during the change, and the special symbol indicating the small hit is forcibly stopped. It is configured to stop. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the lottery result of the jackpot A is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is small in the second special symbol before the variation time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the fluctuation of the lottery result that becomes the hit B, it is possible to forcibly remove the lottery result and stop and display the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A in the first special symbol that is changing, from the latent game state. It is possible to prevent the player from shifting to the probabilistic gaming state, and it is possible to prolong the period of the latent probabilistic gaming state.

Therefore, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time that is the small hit (may be only the small hit B) in the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time that is the big hit (may be only the big hit A) in the first special symbol. By making it easy to select, it is possible to make the game state advantageous to the player.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, when the transition 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) is determined, the fluctuation time at which the hit / fail judgment result becomes a big hit in the first special symbol has a probability of 60 s with a probability of 99%. As for the fluctuation time in which the time is determined and the hit / fail determination result is a small hit in the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a probability of a selection rate of 95%. Further, in the second special symbol, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Therefore, since the fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is started, 120 deviation fluctuations are possible, and the probability of becoming a small hit in the second special symbol is set in 231/459 (see FIG. 103 (a)). Because of this, there is a high probability that the small hit B will be won (the probability that the small hit B will be selected is 1/2 of the small hit winning), the second special symbol will be stopped, and the big hit A will be won. The fluctuation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a deviation. Further, since the specified number of times is set 100 times in the transition 2 table 202ba2 as shown in FIG. 106, the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set until the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. It is fixed and set (the condition is that the latent game state is set (when the latent game state is changed to another game state, the variable pattern selection table corresponding to the game state of the transfer destination (No. 1) 1) is set as in the embodiment). Even if the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table 202ba2 wins a small hit during the set period (within the specified number of times), the migration destination table is not changed and is the same until the specified number of times elapses. The migration destination table is maintained and set.

In this way, by setting the transition 2 table 202ba2, the setting period of the latent game state becomes long, and during that time, the small hit can be won, and the number of small hit wins is increased and given to the player. The number of prize balls can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can make a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the second special symbol is small as in the first embodiment. It may be configured to hit. In addition, only the small hit B is configured to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol at the result of the lottery, but the first special symbol (in the first special symbol) is not limited to this. In the case of a small hit, the second special symbol) may be forcibly stopped by coming off.

Next, the migration 1 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition 1 table 202ba1. The migration 1 table 202ba1 stores migration information by determining the migration 1 table 202ba1 as the migration destination table when a small hit is won by the migration destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106) (end timing of the small hit game). It is a table set in the area 203bc.

In the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. It is configured to determine the fluctuation time of. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. It is configured to be. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. If the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a short fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a high selection probability, and when the second special symbol is a small hit, it is determined. Since the fluctuation time of 1 s or 0.5 s is selected, it is difficult to forcibly stop the first special symbol after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the jackpot A is won in the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the fluctuation, so that the transition destination table (which is disadvantageous to the player) ( It is configured as a fluctuation pattern selection table). Therefore, according to the migration destination selection table 202ba, the number of times (10 times in the present embodiment) specified after the migration of the migration 1 table 202ba1 is large is set to be disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, the probability of being selected is set to 99/100 in the transition destination selection table 202ba, and in the latent game state, the latent game state is set long and the gambling becomes too high. It is configured to suppress defects.

Next, the transition 2 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition 2 table 202ba2. The transition 2 table 202ba2 is set in the transition information storage area 203bc when the transition 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

In the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be determined. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, the long fluctuation time (60s) is determined with high probability as the fluctuation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The fluctuation time selected when is a small hit is configured so that a short fluctuation time (1s) is selected with high probability. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the small hit B is started in the second special symbol after the fluctuation of the big hit in the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not stopped before the first special symbol is stopped. 2 It becomes easier to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol being changed can be forcibly stopped by the determination result of the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the jackpot A, prolong the period in which the latent probability change is maintained and set, increase the number of executions of the small hit game, and increase the number of prize balls for the player.

Further, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is set as short as 0.5 s, so that the fluctuation time (60 s) which is the jackpot of the first special symbol is set. Even after the above is executed, the fluctuation can be made 120 times until the fluctuation stops, and the lottery probability of the small hit is 231/459. Therefore, the first special symbol stops changing multiple times with a high probability. You can win a small hit in the meantime. Of those who won the small hit, the selection ratio of the small hit B is 1/2, so the fluctuation that becomes the small hit B can be easily stopped by the time the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops, and the execution of the big hit A is prevented. It is structured so that it is easy to do.

Next, the special table will be described with reference to FIG. 109. As the special table, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table ba2 is set, and when the specified number of times has elapsed, the variation pattern for selecting the variation pattern in the latent game state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a kind of selection table.

FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table. When the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set and the specified number of times elapses, this special table is stored in the transition information storage area 203bc at the timing when the next fluctuation pattern is selected after the change of the specified number of times is completed. Set.

In the special table, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the fluctuation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured in. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured. Further, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 50%, and the fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 50%. Has been done. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the special table, the selection probability that the fluctuation time of 60 s (seconds) is determined when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit is set higher than that of the transition 1 table 202ba1, while the second is set. The selection ratio in which the fluctuation time of 1s is determined as the fluctuation time of the small hit in the special symbol is set low. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation in the second special symbol is set to 0.5 s, which is shorter than the transition 1 table 202ba1. That is, in the special table, the fluctuation of 60s, which is the jackpot A in the first special symbol, is stopped as compared to the transition 1 table 202ba2, so that the fluctuation of the small hit B of the second special symbol is stopped, so that it is easier to forcibly stop the fluctuation. It is composed of a table that is advantageous to the player, and is equivalent to setting a state of the game that is advantageous to the player by setting a special table.

On the other hand, in the special table, a long fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 1/2 of the fluctuation time of the small hit, so that the fluctuation (variation time 60s) that becomes the jackpot A in the first special symbol is started. It is configured so that a small hit fluctuation of at most one time can be executed. As a result, the special table is configured so as not to be a table more advantageous than the transition 2 table 202ba2.

In this way, the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set, and when the specified number of times elapses, a special table that is in an advantageous game state is set until the next small hit is made and the migration destination table is determined by lottery. It is configured in. As a result, it is configured to suppress that the jackpot A is executed and the latent game state is terminated between the time when the specified number of times elapses and the time when the table is transferred to the next transfer destination table. Further, since the transition 2 table 202ba2, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is set, and even after the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set. , It is possible to maintain a state in which the player's motivation to play is enhanced, and it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the migration destination table to be set next.

Normally, in a gaming machine, the player is most interested in the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, but according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the player is interested in the jackpot game. In the latent game state, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot game in the first special symbol will not be executed, and different expectations can be given depending on the game state, so that the game is more diverse. Can be.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a migration counter 203ba, a post-migration fluctuation count counter 203bb, and a migration information storage area 203bc are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The migration counter 203ba is a counter for determining the migration destination table and the specified number of times (specified number of times) after the migration from the migration destination selection table 202ba. The transition counter 203ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is a counter value that is updated by the process of S2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. be. When the power is turned on, the value backed up when the power is turned off is updated, the RAM is cleared, and when the backup area is initialized, the update is started from the initial value "0". The transition counter 203ba is configured to be acquired based on the fact that the small hit is won in the processing of S1172 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. ing. Regarding the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3, the processing of the second special symbol in the processing of the special drawing 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) is the first special symbol, and the processing of the first special symbol is the first. Since it only replaces each of the two special symbols, its illustration and explanation are omitted.

The post-migration fluctuation count counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the executed special symbol (total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the migration destination table is set. .. The post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb has an initial value when the migration destination table is set in the processing of S1175 in the special figure 2 out-of-variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A certain "0" is set. Further, in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071), the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba after being added one by one. If it is determined whether or not the table exists and the number of times is specified, the process of setting the special table in the transition information storage area 203bc is performed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3 (not shown), the processing for the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is executed in the same manner as in the special drawing 2 deviation variation processing 3.

The migration information storage area 203bc is a storage area in which the migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202ba and the special table set when the specified number of times of the set migration destination table have elapsed are set. When the information of the migration destination table is stored in this area, it is controlled so that the variation pattern is determined from the migration destination table of the stored type as the variation pattern selection table of the special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 112. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31: S306) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (not shown) with respect to the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37: S908) is in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), and the special figure 2 deviation variation process (FIG. 38: S1009) is in the special figure 2 deviation variation. The difference is that the process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) has been changed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special. Since it differs only in that it is changed to a design, detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1001). It is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether it is in the probability change game state or the latent probability change game state. When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 is on, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the high probability time (S1003). After that, the process of S1005 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (S1002: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 and S1004 is a big hit (S1005). When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1005: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set as a big hit (S1007).

Based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the fluctuation count counter 203bb after migration is reset to "0" (S1071). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1005: No), the special figure 2 out-of-order variation process is executed (S1009). After executing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), this processing is terminated. The special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 112, but the processing necessary for starting the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is deviation is Will be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the special figure 2 deviation variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), which is one of the processes in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment. The processing will be described. In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S1101). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1103). For the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol is set (S1104). It is determined whether either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set (S1171). When it is determined that the migration destination table or the special table is set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-migration variation counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set in the processing of S1171 (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, the migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set migration destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S1101: No), the value of the post-shift fluctuation number counter 203bb is incremented by 1 (S1176). Then, in the process of S1176, it is determined whether or not the value of the added post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). When the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a migration command is set (S1179), and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. 2 Set the out-of-order symbol of the special symbol (S1105), and end this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S1177 that the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is not a specified number (S1177: No), the processing of S1178 to S1179 described above is skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment described above will be described. The high-probability gaming state in the latent probabilistic and probabilistic gaming states shifts to the low-probability state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). It may be configured to do so. With such a configuration, even if the migration destination table for forcibly stopping the execution of the jackpot A is continuously determined, the game state can be changed and the gambling property becomes significantly high. Problems can be suppressed.

Further, as a further modification 2 of the third embodiment, the transition destination table to be selected is set to be variable depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the latent probability change gaming state, and for example, 200 times or more (the first). When 1 special symbol and the total number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol fluctuate, the jackpot fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is lengthened (for example, 300s), and the small hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is shortened (for example). , 0.5s) Set. By shortening the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol to 0.5 s, it may be configured to set a migration destination table that is more advantageous for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation to forcibly stop the jackpot A by the small hit of the second special symbol in the latent probability change, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 129. The fourth embodiment is a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state with respect to the second embodiment described above (special symbol high-probability end). The difference is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is added as the condition (condition, high probability end condition of the normal figure) and a new effect is added based on the above-mentioned end condition.

In the second embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set at the start of the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) for indicating the jackpot winning, and the latent probability state is the jackpot. It is configured to continue until the game is started (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the jackpot). Further, when the small hit of the special figure 2 is won and the small hit game is executed during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the small hit. In some cases), the lottery result (big hit) of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and the game is forcibly stopped when the special figure 1 is out of the picture.

With this configuration, since the jackpot game due to the jackpot fluctuation in which the latent probability state is set is not executed, the predetermined latent probability state period (the jackpot fluctuation period in Special Figure 1) can be changed. In some cases, it was possible to provide the player with a latent state for a long period of time, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability change state, the latent state is set at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. As a condition for ending the latent state, a special symbol fluctuation end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is newly added. With this configuration, it is possible to change the period in which the latent state is continuously set by discarding the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1, and the termination condition of the latent state while discarding the jackpot winning. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of danger that the above is established.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as a condition for ending the special symbol fluctuation, a condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol set after the end of the jackpot to the low probability state is set. In other words, if, for example, 50 special map fluctuations are set as the special map variation end condition, if the special map 1 jackpot is won in the 10th special map variation in the probable change state, the remaining 40 special map variations can be won at the maximum. The fluctuation can be executed as a game in the latent state. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the 40th special figure change in the probable change state, only 10 special figure changes can be executed as a game in the latent state. As a result, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the latent state as soon as possible, so that the player can pay attention to the game in the probability change state. can.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect mode of the notification effect for showing that the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state is variably set based on the remaining period of the latent state period. It is configured in. That is, in the present embodiment, the latent state is terminated without winning the jackpot (the condition for ending the special figure fluctuation is satisfied). Therefore, for example, the remaining period of the latent state is short. If the special figure 1 big hit is discarded based on the special figure 2 small hit winning, there is a high possibility that the latent state will end with the big hit being discarded. It may be a disadvantageous game for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the latent state is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) as an effect mode of the notification effect for showing that the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state. Is 30 times or more), an advantageous staging mode is set to suggest that the discarding of the special figure 1 jackpot can be an advantageous game for the player, and the remaining period of the latent state is less than the predetermined period. In this case, it is configured to set a disadvantageous staging mode that suggests that the discarding of the special figure 1 jackpot this time may be a disadvantageous game for the player. As a result, it is possible to suggest the future development of the game to the player, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, depending on the type of the special figure 2 small hit, the small hit type that discards the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the small hit type that does not discard (interrupts). ) It has a small hit type, and is configured to execute the above-mentioned notification effect regardless of the type of the winning small hit. This makes it difficult for the player to know when the special figure 1 fluctuation was discarded.

Next, the flow of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing a flow that is advantageous to the player among the flows of the game in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends and the latent probability state is set. FIG. 114 is a timing chart showing the probability change state after the jackpot ends. This is a timing chart showing a flow that is advantageous to the player among the flows of the game in which the latent state is set after is set. The second implementation described above describes the flow in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the flow when the probability change state shifts to the latent state, and the display mode of the effect display executed at that timing. Since it is the same as the form, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113, among the flow of the game in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends and the latent probability state is set, a flow that is advantageous to the player will be described. As shown in FIG. 113, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the state where the probability change state (50 times) is set after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure change is stopped and displayed at the timing. The number of residual probability changes is subtracted and displayed.

Then, as in the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the third special figure 1 lottery after the probability change state is set, the special figure 1 variation corresponding to the jackpot winning (special figure 1 jackpot variation). At the timing when is started, the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the latent probable state. At this point, if the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the super challenge mode is displayed during the period until the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 113 (b)) (FIG. 91 (a)). reference). Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state becomes feasible, the RUSH mode in which the small hit game is frequently executed is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

In the state where the game state shifts to the latent state due to the execution of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery is repeatedly executed by the right-handed game, and the special figure 2 is among them. When the small hit (small hit B) is won, the small hit notification effect based on the number of residual probability changes at the time when the small hit B is won is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 113, since the small hit B is won when the number of residual probability changes is "44", it is easy to aim for the big hit winning in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period. A “chance display” (FIG. 113 (d)) indicating that the small hit B has been won at a timing favorable to the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a)). Then, after the small hit game is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are newly started, and the RUSH mode indicating that the latent state is in the latent state is displayed (FIG. 113 (e). )). After that, when the number of remaining probability changes is "30", a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big hit game is executed.

As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 113, immediately after the probability change state is set (in the third special figure 1 lottery after the probability change state is set), the special figure 1 jackpot is won and the latent state is changed. Since it is set and the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) is won at an early stage in the latent state (in the second special figure 2 lottery after the latent state is set), special figure 1 It is possible to execute a latent state game for a long period of time without being involved in the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation. Further, since the special figure 2 jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the discarded special figure 1 jackpot, is won during the latent state, the game flow is most advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, many special figure fluctuations are executed from the time when the probability change state is set until the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and the time when the latent state is set. The number of residual probability changes is "7". Then, since the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) was won during the latent state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded. In other words, since the timing at which the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded is the number of residual probability changes of "5", it is difficult to aim for the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period. A "pinch display" ((c) in FIG. 114) indicating that the small hit B has been won at a timing unfavorable to the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (b)).

Further, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, in the seven latent state games executed after the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded, the jackpot was not won in the special figure 2 lottery, so that the jackpot was won. Without winning, the latent state ends and the normal state is entered. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to discard the special figure 1 jackpot as shown in FIG. 113 depending on the timing of discarding the special figure 1 jackpot variation executed during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 114, it is possible to set a case where it is easy to become a player and a case where it is more likely to be disadvantageous to the player if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always feel tense and play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, when a predetermined transition condition (special figure 1 big hit) is satisfied, the probabilistic state is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the maximum period in which the latent state is set varies according to the length of the period until the transition condition is satisfied. That is, as shown in FIG. 114, even if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded immediately after the latent probability state is set, the remaining remaining latent probability period may be short. Therefore, after the probability change state is set, the transition condition to the latent state is established as soon as possible, and after the latent state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is quickly discarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect mode at the time of winning a small hit is changed based on the length of the remaining latent probability period in the latent probability state (the remaining number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent probability state). However, it is not limited to this, for example, it is determined by discriminating between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation during execution and the remaining number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state. Fig. 1 When it is determined that the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state is larger if the jackpot fluctuation is discarded, a "chance display" indicating that the small hit B is won at a timing advantageous to the player is displayed. "Pinch" indicating that the player has won the small hit B at a timing that is disadvantageous to the player when it is determined that the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state is smaller if the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded. It may be configured to display "display".

<Regarding the content of the production in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, an example of a characteristic display mode of the effect among the effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 (a) shows the display content displayed when the residual latency period is a predetermined number of times (30 times) or more, and the small hit B is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, in which the residual latency period is less than a predetermined number of times (30 times), and during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation causes the small hit B. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when it is elected. Of the various display modes (display areas) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be given. Omit.

As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, the height of the special symbol becomes high when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is configured so that the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the number of remaining special figure fluctuations (remaining latency period) until the probability state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol with the latency state set. A small display area Dm21 is formed as a display area for showing a display mode (“44 times” in the figure) for showing. That is, FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the latent state ends when the special figure fluctuation is executed 44 times.

Further, FIG. 115A is displayed when the latent state during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation and the timing when the small hit B is won by the special figure 2 lottery, that is, when the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded. Since the display screen is shown, the small display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode (“541”) indicating that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is forcibly removed, and the small display area Dm2 is displayed. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“246”) in which the variation in Special Figure 2 indicates a small hit. Then, in the main display area Dm, the treasure box 817 is opened as a small hit notification effect for notifying the player that the small hit B has been won, and the effect symbol 818 is displayed in a display mode indicating "V" from the inside. To. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lucky display mode 851 for suggesting that the timing of winning the small hit B during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is an advantageous timing for the player is displayed from the treasure box 817. It is configured in.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 jackpot (there are many prize balls during the jackpot, and it is easy to set a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed). Is configured so as to be easy to be given, and it is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed for other gaming states during the latent probability state.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state and the latent probability state is set, the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and after discarding the running special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded. Fig. 2 Winning a big hit in the lottery is the most advantageous game. However, in the present embodiment, even if the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed, when the special symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the special symbol becomes a low probability state. Since it is configured to shift, if the timing to discard the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is late in the state where the latent probability state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded and the special figure 2 jackpot is set. There was a risk that the high-probability state of the special symbol would end without winning.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining latent probability period at the timing when the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded during the latent probability state is determined, and based on the determination result, the current jackpot discard is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that it can be suggested (notified) whether or not it is a result. Specifically, if the remaining latent probability period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is a predetermined number of times (30 special figure fluctuations) or more, the remaining latent probability state. Since it is possible to easily win the big hit by the special figure 2 lottery, the lucky display mode 851 indicating that the small hit B is won at a good timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a)). ).

On the other hand, if the remaining latency period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is less than the predetermined number of times (30 special figure fluctuations), the special figure 1 is in the remaining latent state. Since it is difficult to win a big hit in FIG. 2 lottery, a pinch display mode 851 indicating that the small hit B is won at a bad timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable according to the residual latency period at the time when the special figure 2 small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to give a further meaning to the small hit game that is frequently performed during the latent state, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that the player does not get bored at an early stage.

<About the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed while the high-probability state of the special symbol is set as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state with respect to the second embodiment described above. It differs in that the condition related to the number of special map fluctuations is added, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the fourth embodiment, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, the special figure change is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Then, it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to set an upper limit for the period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of a special symbol) is set, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the latent probability state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the special figure in the state where the normal state is set. As one jackpot, a jackpot (big hit A) in which a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol) after the jackpot game ends. Since it has a jackpot (big hit B, jackpot C) in which a normal symbol (low probability state) is set, the jackpot game is more than the case of shifting to the latent state via the probability change state after the jackpot game ends. If the latent state is set after the end, it is possible to play the game in the latent state for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game transition between the probabilistic state and the latent probability state, the special symbol is based on the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the high probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state, but not limited to this, the high probability state of the special symbol can be changed on condition that the gaming state has changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. It may be configured to reset the condition for terminating (shifting to the low probability state).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122. In the fourth embodiment, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the second embodiment described above, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different from the point that the configuration of is partially changed. The same elements as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117, in the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type selection 2 table (not shown) is changed to the jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd with respect to the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the variation pattern selection 2 table (not shown) is changed to the variation pattern selection 4 table 202ce. Since the other elements are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd defines the contents of the jackpot type set when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the fourth embodiment, and the jackpot type selection 2 table of the second embodiment described above is defined. On the other hand, the provisions for setting the game state after the jackpot game is completed have been changed.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119, the contents of various tables included in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd will be specifically described. In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type is selected by referring to different tables according to the gaming state. Specifically, the normal use 4 referred to when the jackpot is won in the normal state. It has a table 202cd1 and a probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2 that is referred to when a big hit is won in the probability variation state and the latency state.

FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 118, the content specified in the normal 4 table 202cd1 is a time saving counter instead of the time saving flag 203m for the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 13) also used in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the content regarding the probability variation counter 203cg is specified instead of the probability variation flag 203g at 203 cm, and the other points are the same.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", it is stipulated that "50" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, "50" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and other jackpots. In the case of (“big hit B” to “big hit D”), it is stipulated that “0” is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and “50” is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. That is, when "big hit A" is selected, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the special symbol change (special symbol change) is executed 50 times. When "Big hit B" to "Big hit D" are selected, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is the special figure after the end of the big hit game. It is set to continue until the fluctuation is executed 50 times.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is updated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is stopped. Is configured to be updated (subtracted). That is, when the 50th special figure change is executed after the probability change state is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is "0" and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is "1" during the special figure change period. That is, the latent state is set.

With this configuration, the period for which the latent probability state is set can be changed according to the length of the fluctuation time set for the 50th special figure change. It is possible to be interested not only in the variation lottery result (win / fail determination result) but also in the variation pattern selection result (variation time selection result). Further, in this case, when selecting a fluctuation pattern (off variation pattern) in the case where the lottery result of the 50th special figure variation is out of order, there is a slight probability (for example, 0.1%) for a long time (10). Minutes) deviation fluctuations (ultra-long deviation fluctuations) are configured to be selected, and during the period of the latent state set when this ultra-long fluctuation is selected, rather than winning a big hit in the special drawing lottery. It may be configured so that many benefits are given to the player.

In addition, various counter values and update conditions may be set so that the latent probability state is not set during the final fluctuation in which the probability change state is set (in this embodiment, the 50th special figure change). For example, 51. Immediately before the start of the first special figure change (the period from the establishment of the start condition of the 51st special figure change to the selection of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special figure change), the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set. It may be configured to be "0". As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the period when the 50th special symbol change is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for updating (subtracting) the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set as the stop timing of the special figure change, but the timing is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the stop timing of the 50th special figure change. , Immediately before the start of the 51st special figure change (the period from the establishment of the start condition of the 51st special figure change to the jackpot judgment corresponding to the special figure change or the selection of the fluctuation pattern). It may be configured to update (subtract) the value of the probability variation counter 203cg. With this configuration, even if the special figure change of the 51st transition is executed while the 50th special figure change is being executed, the special symbol will be displayed for the special figure change of the 51st transition. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege because the jackpot determination based on the high probability state is not executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the contents specified in the probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2 will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 119, specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" to "big hit C", "50" is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm, and "50" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. In the case of "big hit D", "0" is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm, and "50" is specified in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. That is, when "big hit A" to "big hit C", that is, special figure 1 big hit is selected, the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) after the end of the big hit game is the special symbol. It is set to continue until the fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) is executed 50 times, and when "big hit D", that is, the special figure 2 big hit is selected, the probability state (high of the special symbol) after the big hit game is completed. The probability state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set to continue until the special figure fluctuation is executed 50 times.

With this configuration, in the high probability state of the special symbol (in the probabilistic state, in the latent probability state), the latent probability state is more likely to be set in the special figure 2 jackpot than in the special figure 1 jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to abandon the special figure 1 jackpot and have the player enthusiastically perform a game aiming at the special figure 2 jackpot. Further, since the jackpot discarded by the special figure 2 small hit is not the most advantageous jackpot for the player, it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120, in the present embodiment, the probability variation counter 203cg is replaced with the probability variation flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203cm is replaced with the time reduction flag 203m with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 19) of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that it is provided, and is the same otherwise. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203cg is a counter for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the period in which the value larger than 0 (1 or more) is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is special. It is configured to be in a high probability state of the symbol. The value of the probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (subtracted by 1) at the timing when the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is stopped. Further, when the stop display (confirmed display) is performed in the display mode indicating that the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is set to "0".

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg (for example, 50 times) is set based on the winning jackpot type at the end timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0, the jackpot determination and the selection of the fluctuation pattern according to the high probability state of the special symbol are executed, and when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the value is subtracted by 1. Will be done. That is, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and when "50" is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, the special symbol is used. The period from the setting of the high probability state to the stop of the 50th special symbol change is set as the high probability state of the special symbol.

The time saving counter 203 cm is a counter for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the period in which the value larger than 0 (1 or more) is set as the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is usually set. It is configured to be in a low probability state of the symbol. The value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted by 1) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started. Further, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is set to "0" at the timing when the big hit fluctuation is executed.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm (for example, 50 times) is set based on the winning jackpot type at the end timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, the hit determination (hit determination of the second symbol) or the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the high probability state of the normal symbol or the like. , The selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed, and when the special symbol variation is executed, the value is subtracted by 1. That is, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and when "50" is set for the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, the height of the normal symbol is set. The period from the setting of the probability state to the start of the 50th special figure change is set as the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg set at the end timing of the jackpot game and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm are set to the same value (50), but the value is not limited to this, and different values are used. It may be configured to be configurable. With this configuration, it is possible to set various game states based on the number of times the special figure change is executed, and it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Specifically, a jackpot type is provided as a part of the jackpot type in which a value smaller than the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg (for example, "100)) is set with the value of the time saving counter 203 cm (for example," 1 "). Therefore, it is preferable to configure the jackpot type in which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game so that the ease of transition from the probability change state to the latent state is different. With this configuration, even if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game can be played while expecting that the latent state is set as soon as possible, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the voice lamp control in the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the apparatus 113.

First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The ROM 222 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above in that a small hit display selection table 222ca is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit display selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting an effect mode (effect mode during the small hit game) for indicating that the small hit has been won during the latent probability state, and is a probability change at the time of the small hit winning. It is configured so that different production modes are selected based on the value of the counter 203 cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm.

Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents specified in the small hit display selection table 222ca in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit display selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 122, the small hit display selection table 222ca defines a different display mode corresponding to the type of the winning small hit, the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223a, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223cc. Has been done.

Specifically, when the small hit type is "small hit A" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "50 to 1", the value of the staging counter 223cc is "chance" in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, when the small hit type is "small hit B" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "50 to 31", "chance" is displayed in the range of the effect counter 223cc value of "0 to 69". When the display mode of "chance" is defined in the range of "70 to 99" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "30 to 1", the value of the staging counter 223cc is "0 to 99". The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the range of.

Here, in the present embodiment, the processing for the change in the special figure 1 being executed differs depending on the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. Specifically, the small hit type. When "small hit A" is selected as, the game is temporarily interrupted without subtracting the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution until the small hit game ends, and after the small hit game ends. When the control (interruption control) for restarting the subtraction of the interrupted fluctuation time is executed and "small hit B" is selected, the timing at which the small hit game is executed (a special symbol in the display mode indicating the small hit) is executed. At the timing when the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed), the control (discard control) for forcibly stopping the change in the special figure 1 being executed in the display mode indicating the deviation is executed.

In this way, by having a small hit that can discard the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation that is being executed and a small hit that cannot be discarded, it is possible to determine whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation that is being executed is discarded. It is possible to prevent the player from being easily discriminated only by whether or not the winning game is executed. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the small hit notification effect is configured to be different based on the selected small hit type. Thereby, by confirming the display mode of the small hit notification effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded.

In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low-probability state, and further, the small hit B is won and is being executed. When the special figure 1 change of No. 1 is discarded, a new special figure 1 change is executed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, if the small hit game based on the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation is frequently executed during the latent probability state, the number of special figure fluctuations is increased due to the special figure fluctuation in which the lottery result is discarded. It will be updated frequently, and it will not be possible to fully entertain the player in the latent state.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the first latent period in which the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is executed in the period in which the latent probability state is set, it is a game to win the small hit B in the special figure 2 lottery. In the second latent period after the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is abandoned, it is advantageous for the player to win the small hit A in the special figure 2 lottery. In this way, by configuring so that the small hit type that is advantageous to the player is switched within the period in which the same game state (latent state) is set, the timing of winning the small hit and the winning It is possible to make the player interested in both the content of the small hit type and the content of the small hit type, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the special figure 1 big hit is discarded by the small hit B won during the latent state. FIG. 1 In a state where the big hit has already been discarded, even if the small hit B is won, the display mode of the small hit display is selected by the same processing as when the small hit A is won. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the small hit that was won after the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation was discarded is "small hit A" or "small hit B".

In the present embodiment, even if the lottery result is abandoned, the special figure change is configured to subtract the number of special figure changes as one special figure change, but the lottery is not limited to this, for example. It may be configured so that the special figure variation in which the result is discarded is not added to the special figure variation number. Specifically, the special figure change number may be updated (subtracted) at the start timing of the special figure change, and the special figure change number may be updated (added) when the lottery result is discarded. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the same number of special symbol lottery results as the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. In the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned second embodiment is provided with a setting of a probability variation counter 203 cg value, a time saving counter 203 cm value, an update process, and a process executed using each value. The difference is that the processing executed based on the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203m, the update process, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203m is deleted. Specifically, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) is replaced with the game state update process (see S332 in FIG. 97) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S331 in FIG. 96). The state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is replaced with the first special symbol change stop process 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98), and the first special symbol change stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is completed. The difference is that the jackpot end process 4 (see S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed instead of the process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99). In the fourth embodiment, the target of the processing executed for the above-mentioned first special symbol (special figure 1) is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Although it differs from the second embodiment in that the process for the special figure 2 changed to the above-mentioned is also executed, the target of the process for the special figure 1 described above is changed to the special figure 2 and used for each process. The elements to be used are also different only in that the element for the special figure 1 is changed to the element for the special figure 2, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) sets the value of the probability variation counter 203cg for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S331 in FIG. 96) instead of the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g. The difference is that the process of determining (see S471 in FIG. 123) and the process of determining the value of the time saving counter 203 cm instead of the setting status of the time saving flag 203 m (see S472 in FIG. 123) are executed. It is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the game state update process 4 (S271) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S271). This game state update process 4 (S271) is executed at the change start timing of the special symbol, and is a process of updating (subtracting) the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and the probability variation counter 203 cg. The process of determining the value and setting the state command for indicating the current game state is executed.

When the game state update process 4 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S671), and 0. When it is determined that it is larger than (1 or more) (S671: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is subtracted by 1 (S672), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203 cm after the subtraction is set. (S673). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S671 that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (0) (S671: No), the process proceeds to S675 described later.

The remaining time reduction command set in the process of S673 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same process as the other commands. By receiving the command for the number of remaining time reductions, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the number of times the special figure changes until the time reduction state (high probability state of the normal symbol) ends, and the effect mode based on the number of remaining time reductions (for example). , Display the number of remaining hours).

After finishing the processing of S673, next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203 cm after subtraction is 0 (S674), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is not 0 (S674: No). This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S674 that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is 0 (S674: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is larger than 0 (S675), and it is determined that the value is larger than 0. If so (S675: Yes), a state command indicating the latent state is set (S653), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is not larger than 0 (S675: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S671, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of the normal symbol (S671: No). Next, the process proceeds to the process of S675 described above, the process of S653 or S654 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately discriminate the game state that is variable based on the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and the discrimination result is surely sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Can be output to. Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the change start timing of the special symbol, and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is updated (subtracted) at the stop display timing of the special symbol. Therefore, the command for indicating the current game state can be set at both the special figure change start timing and the special figure change stop timing. This makes it possible to determine the current gaming state in more detail.

In this embodiment, since the numerical value set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and the numerical value set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg are the same, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg are the same. However, by making the value set in the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value set in the probability variation counter 203 cg different, the game state when the values of various counters become 0. It may be configured to make the transition of. Even in such a case, by using the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 124) of the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably set a command indicating the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is the stop display timing of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the process of updating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is added. The other processing contents are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is executed, the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag indicating that the jackpot in special figure 1 is won among the jackpot flags 203n) is first set to on. If it is determined whether or not the flag is set (S801), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not set to ON (S801: No), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0. (S851).

When it is determined in the processing of S851 that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current state is in the high probability state of the special symbol (S851: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set to 1. Subtraction (S852) was performed, a state command indicating the game state according to the current value of the time saving counter 203 cm, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and the state command indicating the gaming state was set (S853), and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg was subtracted by the processing of S852. A subtraction command indicating that is set (S854), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is not larger than 0 (0) (S8511: No), since the current state is normal, the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the update processing of various parameters (probability change counter 203 cg, time reduction counter 203 cm) that are factors for shifting the gaming state is performed at the start timing and the stop timing of the special figure change. Specifically, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is executed at the start timing of the special figure change, and the process of updating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is executed at the stop timing of the special figure change. .. With this configuration, for example, when a probabilistic state (a game state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set to "50" and the value of the probabilistic counter 203 cg is set to "50") is set, the special figure changes. The value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the start timing of, and when the value becomes "0", the gaming state is changed from the probable change state to the latent state until the special figure fluctuation ends. Furthermore, it is possible to shift the latent state to the normal state at the timing when the special figure fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the latent state only for a specific period (special figure fluctuation period).

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change starts (the timing at which the game state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is executed) and the timing at which the special figure change ends (the first special symbol change stop process 4). (See S251 in FIG. 125) is executed (when), and a state command for indicating the current gaming state is set. With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the gaming state can be changed a plurality of times during the period from the start time to the end of one special figure change, the voice lamp control is performed. The current gaming state can be reliably determined on the device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, a value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set (initial setting) based on the set jackpot type, and a command (number of times command) for indicating the set value (for example, 50) is given. It is configured to output to the voice lamp control device 113, and further, it is configured to output a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg has been subtracted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the count command, the value (for example, 50) of the probability variation remaining count counter 223ca is set based on the information included in the count command, and the subtraction command is received. It is configured to subtract 1 from the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca each time. As a result, the main controller 110 only needs to set a command for indicating the initial setting value (number of times command) and a command for indicating that the subtraction has been performed (subtraction command), and the probability change counter after the subtraction. Since it is not necessary to set a command indicating a value of 203 cg, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 may be configured to set a remaining number of times command for directly indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg.

Returning to FIG. 125, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is on (winning the jackpot) (S801: Yes), the processes of S804 to S816 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. Then, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, in the process of S813 with respect to the second embodiment described above, the element to be reset is the value of the probability variation counter 203cg instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm instead of the time reduction flag 203m. The only difference is that there are some points, but the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126). The jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is a process for defining a gaming state set after the jackpot game ends with respect to the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. Is different. Specifically, in the second embodiment described above, the process of setting (on / off setting) the probability change flag 203 g and the time saving flag 203 m according to the winning jackpot type is executed, whereas in the present embodiment. The difference is that the process of setting the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and the probability variation number in the process of S2701 is executed. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203h is 2 (S2701: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (S2771), and the value of the probability variation counter 203h is set to 0. (S2703), the process proceeds to S2709, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the processing is executed in the order of S2701 and S2704, then it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the probable change state or the latent state (S2772), and then the probable change state or the latent state. If it is determined to be (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S2752), and if it is determined to be jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg. Is set to "50" and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set to "0" (S2775), and the process proceeds to S2709.

Further, in the processing of S2752, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot D (big hits A to C) (S2752: No), then the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg “50” is set for both (S2773), and the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2772 that the gaming state at the time of winning is a probable change state or not a latent state (normal state) (S2772: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is jackpot A. If it is determined (S2706) and it is determined that the jackpot A is (S2706: Yes), the process of S2773 described above is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of S2709.

In the processing of S2705, when it is determined that the hit is not A (S2705: No), "50" is set for the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, "0" is set for the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (S2774), and the processing of S2709. Move to. In the process of S2709, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the probability variation counter 203 cg set in the jackpot end process 4 (S2571) described above is executed. The number of times command for indicating the value of and the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is set (S2776), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a maximum period (value of the probability variation counter 203 cg on the main control device 110 side) in which a high probability state of a special symbol can be set with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above. Processing for displaying (suggesting) the display mode (probability change remaining number display) for notifying (suggesting) the player of the special figure change number required until becomes 0, and the process for displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the latent. Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded by this small hit winning (execution of the small hit game) in the small hit notification effect that is executed when the small hit is won with the probability state set. It is different from the process of setting the display mode for suggesting. The other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4151) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4151). This command determination process 4 (S4151) differs from the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) in that a process when a command for the remaining number of times is received from the main control unit 110 is added, and other than that. The elements of are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 4 (S4151) is executed, the same processes of S4201 to S4214 as the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) are executed, and the fluctuation stop related command is received in the process of S4213. If it is determined that there is no such command (S4213: No), then a count-related command (a count command for indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg has been subtracted) is received. If it is determined that the command has been received (S4251), and if it is determined that the command has been received, the count-related process is executed (S4252), and this process is terminated.

Here, in the number-of-times related process executed in the process of S4252, the presence / absence of a high probability state of the special symbol and the period (remaining period) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. Is determined, and a process of setting a display command for displaying the display mode (number of residual probabilities) based on the determination result is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4252 that the command related to the number of times has not been received (S4251: No), the same process of S4215 to S4221 as the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4151 of FIG. 59) is executed. Execute this process.

Here, the contents of the number-of-times related process (S4252) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number-of-times related process (S4252). When this count-related process (S4252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the number-related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not a subtraction command (S5401: No), subtraction is performed. Various processes executed when a command is received are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5410 described later.

If it is determined that the related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is larger than 0 (S5402), and if it is determined to be large. (S5402: Yes), the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is subtracted by 1 (S5403), a display remaining number command indicating the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca after subtraction is set (S5404), and then after subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405).

In the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405: Yes), the high probability state of the special symbol is about to end, so that the high probability state of the special symbol is about to end. Set a display command that suggests that is terminated (S5406). Here, in the present embodiment, the ending suggestion notification for suggesting the timing when the high probability state of the special symbol actually ends is performed when the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (after, the special figure of one rotation). It is configured to be executed when the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when the fluctuation is executed, but the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 2 without limitation. When the above specific value (for example, 5) is reached, the above-mentioned ending suggestion notification may be executed.

After finishing the processing of S5406, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation count counter 223ca is 0 (S5407), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining count counter 223ca is 0 (S5407; Yes), Next, an end display command for suggesting that the high-probability state of the special symbol ends is set (S5408), the hit discard flag 112 cab is set to off (FIG. S5409), and the process proceeds to S5410. on the other hand. In the processing of S5407, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is larger than 1, that is, when it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol continues (S5407: No), S5410 is used as it is. Move to processing.

When the process of S5410 is executed, first, it is determined whether the number-related command received this time is a number-of-times command (S5410), and if it is determined to be a number-of-times command (S5410: Yes), it is included in the number-of-times command. Based on the information indicating the value of the probability change counter 203 cg, the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is set to “50” (S5411), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5410 that the command is not the number of times command (S5410: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing content of S5406 executed in the above-mentioned number-of-times related processing (see S4252 in FIG. 128) will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, there are a probabilistic state and a latent probabilistic state as game states in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a different production mode is executed in each game state. There is. Specifically, the challenge mode effect (see FIG. 89) is executed when the probability change state is set, and the RUSH mode effect (see FIG. 90) is executed when the latent state is set. .. Then, when the process of S5406 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a latent state, and a display command corresponding to the determination result is set. There is. Not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, a display command suggesting that the high probability state of the special symbol ends regardless of the game state is set, and the display control device 114 side receives the display command. In this case, the end suggestion effect corresponding to the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed.

Next, the contents of the small hit-related process 4 (S5054) will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S5054). The small hit-related process 4 (S5054) is the above-mentioned small hit-related process (see S5004 in FIG. 71) in that a process for setting an effect mode during the small hit game executed in the latent state is added. Is different from. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit-related process 4 (S5054) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251). In this process, the current gaming state stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and the determination is executed based on the read information. If it is determined in the process of S5251 that the current game state is not the latent state (S5251: No), a small hit display command corresponding to the current game state is set, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is not an appropriate game to execute the small hit game in a state where the latent state is not set, for example, an error notification (comment of "Please hit left"). It is configured to execute the display during the small hit game including.

On the other hand, in the process of S5251 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251: Yes), then it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is the small hit B. (S5252), if it is determined that the small hit B is (S5252: Yes), the hit discard flag 223cc is set to ON (S5253), and the process proceeds to S5254. On the other hand, in the processing of S5252, if it is determined that the small hit type this time is not the small hit B (small hit A) (S5252: No), the processing of S5253 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5254. ..

In the processing of S5254, it is determined whether the hit discard flag 223 cab is set to ON (S5254), and if it is set to ON (S5254: Yes), regardless of the small hit type of the winning small hit this time. The display mode is determined with reference to the small hit A table of the small hit display selection table 222ca (S5256), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S5254 that the hit discard flag 223 cc is not set to ON (S5254), it is small based on the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg and the value of the acquired effect counter (not shown). The display mode during the small hit game is determined from the hit display selection table 222ca (S5255), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and this process is terminated.

That is, in the small hit-related process 4 (S5054 in FIG. 129) executed in the present embodiment, the small hit B of the small hit display selection table 222ca is selected only when the small hit B is won for the first time after the latent probability state is set. It is configured to set the display mode by referring to the table. That is, the display mode is determined using a dedicated table (table for small hit B) only at the time of small hit winning that can discard the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation, and other small hit winning (small hit A winning and already). Special Figure 1 When the small hit B is won after discarding the big hit fluctuation, a common table (table for small hit A) is used to determine the display mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small hit type of the small hit that was won after discarding the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues (the number of times the special figure changes) is defined, the special figure change is discarded based on the small hit winning, and the number of times the special figure changes is useless. Can be obscured to be subtracted.

<First production example showing an example of the production performed in each of the above-described embodiments>
As described above, in the first to third embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. During the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol (the period during which the special symbol (identification information) for indicating that the jackpot has been won is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed)), the other special symbol is stopped indicating the small hit winning. When the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed in the mode, the small hit game based on the stopped display small hit is executed, and the technical concept of forcibly removing the running big hit fluctuation and stopping (discarding the big hit) is explained. did.

Further, the above-mentioned first embodiment is configured so that the jackpot winning of the second special symbol is easier to execute the jackpot game which is advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a small hit can be won only by a lottery of special symbols. In addition, as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is more difficult to be executed than the advantageous gaming state (for example, the latent state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the advantageous gaming state (latent state). It is configured so that a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal state) can be set.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol from being executed in the state where the advantageous gaming state is set. That is, by discarding the jackpot by winning the small hit, it is possible to provide a player's advantageous state (a state that is more advantageous than the case where the jackpot is not discarded).

Further, in the second embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation display of the special symbol for showing the jackpot winning is executed from the timing. The period until the variation display ends is configured to set the latent probability state, and the latent probability state is configured to be a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

Then, as in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won, and the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). , The variable display of the first special symbol being executed is configured to be forcibly terminated (the jackpot is discarded) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the jackpot of the first special symbol is discarded based on the fact that the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the end condition of the latent state is also combined. Since it can be discarded, the period in which the latent state is set can be longer than the initially set period (the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol). That is, by discarding the big hit by winning the small hit, it is possible to prolong the period in which the player's advantageous state (latent state) is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, any of the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in a small hit. However, if a small hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol, the other big hit can be discarded.

In the third embodiment configured in this way, when a gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the latent state may end due to the execution of the jackpot game. It can be suppressed from occurring. That is, by discarding the big hit by winning the small hit, it is possible to prolong the period in which the player's advantageous state (latent state) is set.

As described above, in each of the above embodiments, the player can be given a first privilege game (big hit game) that can give a privilege advantageous to the player, and a privilege less than the first privilege game (big hit game). The second privilege game (small hit game) is configured to be executable, and depending on the situation in which the second privilege game is executed, a special privilege (setting an advantageous game state or advantageous) is given to the player. It is configured so that an extension of the period in which the game state is set) can be given.

Further, when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied, the condition for executing the first privilege game is discarded, but the timing when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied is satisfied. Or, depending on the game content of the first privilege game executed based on the discarded condition, when the condition for executing the first privilege game is destroyed based on the establishment of the condition for executing the second privilege game. Is configured to be more advantageous to the player than if it is not discarded.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied, specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode for showing the small hit winning. If this is done, a privilege other than the privilege for executing the second privilege game (small hit game) (for example, a privilege for discarding a jackpot for which a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player among a plurality of jackpot types is set, or It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the player is given a privilege (such as a privilege to discard the jackpot that ends the advantageous game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect for showing the player that the small hit has been won is executed, not only the presence or absence of the small hit winning but also the small hit game other than the small hit game given by the small hit winning is performed. It is configured to inform the player of the presence or absence of the privilege. Here, in this production example, the content of the production at the time of winning a small hit, which is executed in the pachinko machine 10 having the technical idea of each of the above-described embodiments, will be described.

In this production example, as an effect for showing a small hit winning (small hit suggestion effect), a winning / failing mode indicating the presence / absence of a small hit winning and a discarding mode indicating the lottery content of a special symbol discarded by the small hit winning are used. , Is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, as the winning / failing mode, the first winning / failing mode formed by the letter "V" for notifying the small hit winning and the letter "sorry" for notifying the small hit non-winning are formed. At least the second winning / failing mode and the third winning / failing mode formed by the character "?" To inform (suggest) whether or not a small hit has been won are made displayable, and the big hit is won as a discard mode. The first discard mode formed by the letters "lucky" to notify that the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is discarded, and the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that has not won the jackpot is discarded. The second discard mode formed by the display mode of "??" for notifying the above, and the notification that the change (lottery) of the special symbol is simply discarded without suggesting the lottery result of the discarded special symbol. The third discard mode, which is formed by the character "destroy", is configured to be at least displayable.

By setting the effect mode in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the small hit is won and the content of discarding the special symbol change executed based on the small hit, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to provide fun to predict future game contents.

In this production example, the above-mentioned winning / failing mode and the discarding mode are configured to be displayed in different modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning / failing determination result of the small hit and the discarding mode are discarded. It may be configured to set the display mode of one effect mode (fusion mode) based on both the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, since it is possible to predict a plurality of game results from the displayed fusion mode, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game content.

Further, in this production example, the pass / fail mode and the discard mode are displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail mode is displayed and then the discard mode is displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the pass / fail mode after displaying the discard mode. In this way, by making the display timings of the above-mentioned two modes (whether or not mode, discard mode) different, it is possible to easily predict the mode to be displayed next after confirming the mode displayed earlier. .. In addition, the game can be played while hoping that a predetermined aspect is displayed as the content of the next aspect displayed after grasping the previously displayed aspect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this production example, when a small hit is won (stopped and displayed by a small hit symbol) in one special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), the change of the other special symbol is executed. If there is no special symbol change that is discarded by the small hit winning this time, the above-mentioned discarding mode is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the game status at the time of winning the small hit based on the display mode displayed at the time of winning the small hit (when the small hit symbol is stopped).

Further, in this production example, when the lottery result of the special symbol discarded based on the small hit winning is a big hit, the big hit type set in association with the big hit is determined, and based on the determination result. It is configured so that the display mode (display mode of the first discard mode) can be changed. In addition, the game state set at the time of winning the small hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit) is determined, and the display mode (first discard mode) is also based on the determination result. The display mode) is configured to be variable. Specifically, it is configured to set the above-mentioned pass / fail mode and discard mode only when the latent state is set as the game state. With this configuration, only when the game is greatly affected by discarding the other special symbol change that is being executed based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is won in a small hit, the winning / failing mode and Since the effect using the discard mode can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Second production example showing an example of the production performed in each of the above-described embodiments>
In the above-mentioned first production example, the production for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to be discarded based on the small hit winning to the player has been described. By executing such an effect, it is possible to suggest to the player various benefits given based on winning the small hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .. On the other hand, as in each of the above-described embodiments, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in one special symbol, a small hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol (conditions for executing the small hit game are satisfied). As a result, the playability that makes it possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player is a new playability that has never existed in the past. Therefore, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in one special symbol, the other There was a risk that the privilege could not be obtained without playing a game aiming for a small hit with the special design of.

Therefore, in this second production example, a production for aiming for a small hit winning with the other special symbol based on the fluctuation status (lottery result) of one special symbol will be described in detail.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) change executed during the latent state is a big hit, and it is a big hit (the special figure change during execution is a big hit). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot is variable), it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is being executed or whether the special figure 2 hold exists. Here, if it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery is being executed or the special figure 2 hold exists, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is obtained by winning the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery. Since it is possible to discard it, a normal right-handed notification is executed for the player.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is being executed during the latent probability state, the special figure 2 lottery is not being executed, and the special figure 2 hold does not exist, the state remains as it is. Then, since it is not possible to discard the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation based on the small hit winning, the strong right-handed notification that emphasizes the right-handed game to the player rather than the normal right-handed notification is given. Run. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning from being executed during the latent state, and the disadvantageous situation is provided to the player.

It should be noted that the second effect example is not limited to the above-mentioned effect mode, and for example, when the special figure 1 change during execution is not a big hit, that is, when the change is out of order, the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Even if it is not inside and there is no special figure 2 hold, it is configured not to execute the strong right-handed notification. Further, in this case, during the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed (during the long fluctuation), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is not executed, and the special figure 2 lottery may be executed. Since there is no such state, it is possible to execute an effect display informing the player that the game can be temporarily rested and the player can leave the seat.

As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the winning prize is a trigger for each lottery. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes lottery in the order in which information is acquired (the order of entry into the first entry port 64 and entry into the second entry opening 640), and the lottery of one of the special symbols. It may be configured to be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the type to be executed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, and when a specific jackpot is won in either symbol, the other symbol is stopped when the fluctuation is stopped. It is configured to discard the fluctuation (forced stop due to disconnection) or to execute the interruption, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Furthermore, even if a small hit is won due to the change of the other special symbol, the change of the other special symbol is discarded or interrupted according to the small hit type, but the change of the small hit starts. It may be set at times.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described, but the effects have the same purpose and effect. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that makes the player surely grasp the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly informs the content are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main control unit 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the above-mentioned set values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When various configurations are used, various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value. In the set value of, if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from one special symbol is performed. Various parameters may be specified for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be limited to the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the motivation of the player who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits discard big hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to other than the specific first determination result based on the established condition during the specified period. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a switching means capable of switching between and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first control for forcibly making a result other than a specific first determination result according to a condition in which the dynamically displayed first identification information is established, and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display. Since it is switched and executed by the switching means, the content of the first identification information dynamically displayed can be different from that at the start of the dynamic display, and various effects can be provided to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Under the above condition, in the gaming machine A1, the switching means is provided with the first type privilege in the second privilege during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. As the first condition, the first control can be executed, and the second type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed, with the second condition being the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the privilege given can be switched, so that the gaming machine A2 is given to the player. It has the effect of making it easier to recognize the benefits.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means executes dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination of the specific first determination result as at least one of the conditions for satisfying the first condition. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is conditioned on the fact that it has been played.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the condition for satisfying the first condition is that the first identification information based on the determination as a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Since it is set to at least one of the above, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the granting of the first privilege and limit the privilege to be granted.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first privilege is set to be more advantageous than the second privilege, so that the first privilege is forcibly stopped. By suppressing this, there is an effect that the problem that the gambling property becomes high in a short period of time can be suppressed and the second privilege can be easily given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming state setting means has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The means is characterized in that it is possible to set the first gaming state based on the grant of the first privilege while the second gaming state is set. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the granting of the first privilege is restricted by the execution of the first control, so that the first gaming state is not granted instead of the first privilege. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's interest is significantly reduced due to the transition from the second gaming state.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming machine A6 has a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect for facilitating the establishment of the first condition.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a suggestion effect that makes it easier for the first condition to be satisfied is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied by executing the suggestion effect. It has the effect of making people expect and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic B group> (Variable difficulty in discarding large hit fluctuations due to small hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. (1) The gaming machine B1 comprising: a first control means capable of executing control and a frequency variable means capable of varying the frequency at which the first condition is satisfied.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency at which the first control is executed can be changed by the frequency changing means, the frequency at which the first privilege is given can be changed, and the game becomes monotonous. It has the effect of suppressing problems that cause people to get bored early.

In the gaming machine B1, the first condition can be satisfied based on the fact that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The frequency-variable means is characterized in that the establishment frequency is changed by changing the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be changed by changing the second dynamic display period corresponding to the specific second determination result to be determined, so that it is easy. There is an effect that the frequency can be changed by various controls.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, as the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means, a short dynamic display period group in which a short dynamic display period is easily selected and a long dynamic display period group are used. A long dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is easily selected and a long dynamic display period group are set, and the frequency variable means is either the short dynamic display period group or the long dynamic display period group. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the establishment frequency is changed by setting one of them.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment frequency can be changed by switching the dynamic display period group. Therefore, by setting various dynamic display period groups, it is possible to change the establishment frequency. It has the effect of being able to switch the frequency of establishment in various ways.

<Characteristic C group> (Variable period of advantage by winning small hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting the above, the gaming state setting means is the first during a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is possible to switch from one gaming state to the second gaming state and set it, and the gaming machine is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first privilege is granted. The game state is set, and the first condition is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. (1) The gaming machine C1 comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to avoid switching to the gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player by executing the first control, so that the gaming is performed with the expectation that the first condition is satisfied. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine C2, which is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the second privilege is given, so that the first privilege is given and it is possible to avoid setting a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the grant of the second privilege, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means can determine a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and is based on the determination as the special second determination result. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given to the player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given to the player by the second determination, so that the granting of the first privilege is restricted. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that reduces the player's motivation to play.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied even when the special privilege is given.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is regulated that the first privilege is given even when the special privilege is given, which is disadvantageous to the player. While restricting the setting of the gaming state, it has the effect of giving the player a special privilege and improving the interest of the gaming.

When the special privilege is granted in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted until the cancellation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the special privilege is given, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, so that the special privilege is given. Even after that, there is an effect that the result of the first judgment can be made interesting.

<Characteristic D group> (Aim for advantageous jackpot during jackpot fluctuation (remove replay on ST machine))
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided by a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for indicating the second determination result specific to the display means. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting the above, the game state setting means is based on the fact that the first privilege is given when the second game state is set. , The first gaming state is set, and the second gaming state is switched to the first gaming state and set based on the number of determinations by the first determining means or the second determining means being the number of endings. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine D1, the player may be switched to the first gaming state when the number of determinations reaches the end number, or the first privilege may be given and the first gaming state may be set. It is possible to play a variety of games, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, is based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result, and the second gaming. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is possible to set the state and then set the first gaming state after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the period of the second gaming state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. It has the effect of making the player interested in the dynamic display period and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first identification that is dynamically displayed is based on the satisfaction of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized by having a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to forcibly make a result other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent the transition to the gaming state, and there is an effect that the expectation for the establishment of the first condition can be raised and the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first condition is that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to be established on the condition of.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is a requirement that the first condition can be satisfied that the second privilege is given, so that the value for the second privilege can be increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic E group> (C group production for the remaining period of advantageous period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. 1 Suggestion suggesting the remaining period of the first dynamic display period when the first control means capable of executing the control and the first identification information that is the specific first determination result are dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine E1, when a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, a suggestion mode suggesting the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, and the first condition is satisfied. 1 The player can recognize the period during which the grant of the privilege is restricted, can be interested in the timing when the first privilege is granted, and suppresses the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine E1 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is the first. 1 When the gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. The featured gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of increasing the value.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is a condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is configured so as to be established.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition can be satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given, so that the value of the second privilege being given is valued. It has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic F group> (Notifies the period when the small hit win is advantageous)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided by a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for indicating the second determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the second privilege is granted based on the timing of granting the second privilege. The gaming machine F1 characterized by having a privilege variable means for varying the privilege to be given.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given by the second privilege is changed depending on the timing of granting the second privilege, the player can be interested in the timing when the second privilege is granted. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine F1, the dynamic display is performed based on the execution of the granting of the second privilege during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to avoid the granting of the first privilege by executing the first control, and it is possible to increase the value of the second privilege. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege, and is granted when the first control is executed. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it can notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege that can be obtained.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that was not granted by the suggestion information, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. be.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the contents of destruction)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. In a gaming machine having a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is When displayed, the privilege type to be granted to the player is the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege corresponding to one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types, and the first dynamic display means. During the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly specified. If the specific first determination result is given by the first control means capable of executing the first control other than the first determination result and the first privilege granting means when the first control is executed. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a notifying means for notifying suggestive information capable of suggesting information corresponding to the type of the first privilege.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that was not granted due to the execution of the first control by the suggestion information, and the player can improve the interest of the game and the player can be early. It has the effect of suppressing problems that make you tired of playing games.

In the gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the first condition can be satisfied by giving the second privilege, so that there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the grant of the second privilege, and the effect executing means changes the effect based on the suggestion information. A gaming machine G3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the effect executed based on the granting of the second privilege is varied by the suggestion information, so that the first privilege and the granting are given. It is possible to compare with the second privilege to be given, and there is an effect that the interest can be enhanced.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the hobby of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. Was aimed at improving the interest by providing the game to the players.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means. The first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the image on the display means, and the first action capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. When the first identification information is displayed on the target display period determining means and the display mode for showing the specific first determination result, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given. The display means is dynamically displayed with the first privilege granting means, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means. The second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the display. When the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing the specific second determination result on the means, the second privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the above- mentioned identification . The first gaming state in which the probability of being determined as the first determination result is higher than in the normal time is set, and the setting of the high probability and the setting which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting the second game state to be performed, and the game state setting means starts dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. It is possible to switch from the first gaming state to the second gaming state at a certain timing, and the gaming machine can be set from the second gaming state when the first privilege is granted. It is possible to set a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and based on the establishment of the first condition during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The device has a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result. be.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means are moved to the display means. A first dynamic display means capable of displaying a target and a first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. And, when the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the specific first determination result on the display means, the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege which is advantageous to the player. And the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means. The dynamic display means, the second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the above-mentioned specific to the display means. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing the second determination result, and the specific first determination result. The first game state in which the probability of being determined to be higher than the normal time is set, and the second game in which the high probability setting and the setting more advantageous to the player than the first game state are set. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a state, and the game state setting means is said to have a timing at which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is started. It is possible to switch from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and set it, and the gaming machine is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first privilege is granted. It is possible to set the gaming state, and the dynamic display is based on the establishment of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. It has a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result .

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the third symbol in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when there is a reserved ball only in special figure 1 at the ending of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the dash mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1 Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the end of the dash mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the end of the dash mode, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the latent probability state is set after the big hit displayed in, and (c) is the third symbol display displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot displayed on the device and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the above, and (c) shows the contents of the second hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the latent probability table set in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a temporary stop process of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 cancellation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the contents of the display screen in a probable change state displayed by a device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 (non-variation in special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of special figure 2 small hit in RUSH displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 (during the change of special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped during the fluctuation per special figure 1 displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot special selection 2 table for probability variation latent probability set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 3 table set in the ROM of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the migration destination selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 1 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the number of residual probability changes is 30 times or more at the time of transition to the latent probability state in the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game when the number of residual probability changes is less than 30 times at the time of transition to a latent probability state in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the small hit B is won in the state where the remaining number of RUSH is 30 times or more, and (b) is the figure which is small when the remaining number of RUSH is less than 30 times. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a hit B. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables for normal use set in the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables for probability variation / latency set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit display selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the number of times related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the aircraft to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. Ball mouth 63, upper first ball opening 64b1, lower first ball opening 64b2, second ball opening 640, left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable It is configured by assembling the display device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 penetrate through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has entered (winned) into the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 or the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not the ball has been entered (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball However, when a ball is entered (winning) in the second entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37A shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. The first symbol display device 37B is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. ..

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is triggered by the fact that there is a ball entry (winning) in the upper first entry slot 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. Is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the ball is easily won in the specific winning opening 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650, and each winning opening is in an open state. By winning a ball, a game in which many prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and then the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the opening period (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, or the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65) is executed. , A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the next Closed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the round game is started, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The ending period in which the state is set and the jackpot game period consisting of the ending period are set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), by setting the opening period, the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots to be determined are 16 rounds of jackpot games, a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot, a 16R latent jackpot with a low probability of a normal symbol, and a jackpot. High probability state of special symbol after big hit with 2 rounds of game, 2R latent jackpot with low probability of normal symbol, high probability state of special symbol after big hit with 2 rounds of big hit game , A 2R probability variation jackpot that gives a high probability state of a normal symbol is prepared.

In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is not the above-mentioned big hit, but a part of the case where it is determined to be out of the game, the privilege less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the right variable winning device 650 is opened only for one round, and the opening is in progress. The privilege of giving a prize ball corresponding to the number of balls won in the game) is configured to win a small hit given to the player. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is not only indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

In the present embodiment, any one of "normal state", "latent probability state", and "probability change state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/229), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to low probability (11/233). In the game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120) in the probability variation state, and the normal symbol hits. It is a gaming state in which the probability is set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won is set. It is configured so that the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game. As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game while being aware of the set game state.

Here, to explain in detail the jackpot type of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "16R latent probability jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 (right variable winning device (second attacker) 650). This is a jackpot type in which a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set after a jackpot game that opens for 16 rounds.

"2R latent jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 for 2 rounds) and then a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol). , A low-probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a jackpot type.

"2R probability change jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (left variable winning device (1st attacker) 65 is opened for 2 rounds, and the probability change state after the jackpot game (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) This is the jackpot type for which the high probability state) is set.

When the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot" is executed in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is set for a predetermined period (30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls). A game (round game) that is released (a period until a prize is won) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times). Therefore, by performing a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right variable winning device 650) during this jackpot game, the right variable winning device 650 can easily win a ball. The right variable winning device 650 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning ball, and more prize balls are given to the player than the left variable winning device 65 described later. It is configured so that it can be done.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" or the "2R latent jackpot", the jackpot game corresponding to the above-mentioned "16R latent jackpot" is performed as the opening operation of the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65. A more restricted opening operation is performed. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) during one big hit game is executed twice, and a big hit game is executed. Will be done. The left variable winning device 650 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning ball, and less prize balls than the above-mentioned right variable winning device 650 are given to the player. Will be. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot" has a longer opening period of the attacker during the jackpot game than the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" or the "2R latent jackpot". Is long and is configured so that many prize balls can be easily obtained. With this configuration, different amounts of benefits (prize balls) can be given to the player according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, so that the player wins the jackpot. It is possible to make people interested not only in whether or not to do it, but also in the set jackpot type. In this embodiment, the jackpot game (the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R latent jackpot") that is advantageous to the player is executed a larger number of round games than the other jackpot games, and further. It is configured so that the number of prize balls for each winning ball is also large, but it is sufficient if the amount of prize balls given during the jackpot game is different, for example, it is executed during the jackpot game. The number of rounds to be played may be the same and only the number of prize balls for one ball may be different, or the number of prize balls for one ball may be the same and only the number of round games executed during the jackpot game. It may be configured to be different. Further, the game state set after the end of the big hit game may be configured to be different depending on the type of the variable winning opening that is opened during the big hit game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a general entry slot 63 is provided in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. To the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and to the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. There is provided with a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower parts are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time.

In addition, as a process for determining that an illegal game (for example, a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed and notifying an abnormality, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example) by the right-handed game. It is preferable to configure it so that the abnormality notification is executed when it is determined that the number is 2 or more. As a result, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of balls fired due to a player's operation error from invading the right side region and executing abnormality notification.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol height is increased by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 that flow down the left area (about). 50%) is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 through which a ball can enter is arranged. Further, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37A shows a display according to the lottery result.

Below the upper first ball entry port 64b1, a lower first ball entry port 64b2 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the first entry opening switch. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37A shows a display according to the lottery result. That is, in the first embodiment, the same jackpot lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is used regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. ) Is configured to be executed.

A second entrance 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged in the right region of the game board 13 on the right side of the lower first entrance 64b2. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. Further, a general ball entry port 63 is arranged in the left side region of the game board. The general entry port 63 is arranged so that among the balls flowing down the left side region, the balls flowing down the flow path where it is difficult to reach the left variable winning device 65 can easily enter. As a result, for example, during a jackpot game in which the left variable winning device 65 is open, even if a ball launched by the left-handed game flows down a flow path that cannot win the left variable winning device 65, the player is given a privilege. (Prize ball) can be given.

When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entry opening 640, one ball is paid out. It is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. Further, when a ball enters the general entry port 63, six balls are paid out as prize balls. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls increases because the ball only wins at the second entrance 640 where one prize ball is set. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being performed during the normal state.

Further, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, but in the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state. 2 As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of the special symbol (special drawing 2), a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 from being efficiently executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the right-handed game (the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the right area of the game board 13 in the state where the normal state is set, Even if the game for entering the ball into the second entrance 640) is executed, it takes a long time until the result of one lottery is confirmed, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the left-handed game is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It is structured so that only a small number of prize balls can be won. That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the upper first is to execute the left-handed game (the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13). It is an advantageous game for the player to perform a game (a game for entering a ball into the ball entry port 64b1).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 and the case where the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. The number of prize balls to be paid out is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out, but the number of prize balls to be paid out and the second ball to be paid out when a ball is won in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry slot 64b2. The same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the mouth 640, for example, the prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. The number may also be configured as one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured in a single blade shape, and is in a closed state that restricts the ball from entering the lower first entry port 64b2 (see the electric accessory 64a (solid line) in FIG. 2). The ball is variably controlled to an open state (see the electric accessory 64a (broken line) in FIG. 2) that allows the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

The electric accessory 64a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured to prevent the ball from entering the lower first entry port 64b2. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) by lottery, the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is composed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the character for the effect (not shown), and the operation content to the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22. It may be configured in.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7 (a). 5 (a) and 5 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbols are formed in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (Refer to FIG. 6A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 6A), and the special symbol lottery is performed. It is configured to show the result, but is not limited to this, for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that deforms a figure by using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, and a display mode. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed by the display mode which changes a color, and stopping and displaying the display mode which shows a specific symbol or a color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the right variable winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left-handed" is a predetermined period (for example, after the right-handed game is completed). It is configured to be displayed (for 10 seconds). Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state or the probabilistic state, the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) ". It is configured so that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 5 (b). Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm1a is the area where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (reserved) is displayed. The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6A, but in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the reserved winning information is stored in advance. It is configured to display a display mode in which the discriminated result (look-ahead result) can be suggested and notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved memory numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a new ball is inserted into the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. Continue until you hit the ball. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640 However, it is rare that there is no entry, and in many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games have been played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a new ball has entered any of the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. In that case, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the upper 1 entry port 64b1, the lower 1st entry opening 64b2, or the 2nd entry opening 640 (starting prize), the first special is set in the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. The variable display of the symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variablely displayed at the same time, and it is easy to draw (change) each special symbol according to the set gaming state. Is configured to be different. Then, the lottery (variation) is executed in the game state in which the third symbol, which is the target of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, is set among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured to be a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is easily created. With such a configuration, regardless of which game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable effect using the third symbol at all times, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. The configuration is not limited to the configuration used in the present embodiment, and for example, the type of the special symbol to be associated as the third symbol may be changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The one-time variation effect may be configured to be set based on both the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the special figure 2. Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set is executed, and 5 seconds later, the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of 50 seconds is set is executed, the variation is 30 seconds. When the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, a fluctuation effect of 55 seconds is set, and within the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery result) of 30 seconds and the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation of 50 seconds are set. The result (lottery result) may be configured to notify the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the lottery results of a plurality of special symbol lottery by one variation effect, so that the lottery result set when both the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change are out of order is out of order. It is possible to make the number of variable effects set to indicate that the number is smaller than the number of lottery (number of fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to the frequent execution of the variable effect indicating the deviation.

First, among the effect contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability of the normal symbol) after the jackpot game of the present embodiment is completed. The flow of the game when the state) is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (b) and 7 (c). FIG. 7B is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "0" at the end of the jackpot game. FIG. 7 (c) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "3" at the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, different game states are set after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type, and when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special figure 2 game (right-handed) The game) is set to be advantageous to the player. Specifically, during the latent state, the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is easier to be executed than in other gaming states (a short fluctuation time is easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery). This special figure 2 lottery is set so that it is easier to win a lottery result (big hit (big hit D), small hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery.

However, since the present embodiment is a game machine of the simultaneous fluctuation type (having a function of executing the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change at the same time (in parallel)), it is latent after the jackpot game is completed. After the state is set, the right-handed game is performed, the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) is being executed, but the special figure 1 is held at the end of the big hit game. If is remembered, or if the ball launched after the jackpot game ends, enters the upper 1 entry slot 64b1 or the lower 1st entry slot 64b2, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed. Become. Then, when the big hit is won by the special figure 1 lottery prior to the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit), the player is in the latent state. There is a problem that the jackpot game, which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed, which gives the player a sense of distrust. In order to solve the problem, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit), the big hit of the running special figure 1 is performed. It is configured so that the fluctuation can be forcibly stopped by deviating from the lottery result (variation result). In addition, as the lottery probability of special figure 2, the probability of winning a small hit (about 1/2 in the special figure high probability state) is higher than the probability of winning a big hit (about 1/110 in the special figure high probability state). It is configured to have a high probability. With this configuration, even if the jackpot fluctuation of Special Figure 1 is executed while the latent state is set, the special figure 2 game can be executed multiple times during the fluctuation period. It is possible to forcibly remove and stop the jackpot fluctuation of 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a jackpot game based on the special figure 1 lottery (a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot game based on the special figure 2 lottery) during the latent state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a feeling of distrust. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state can be set immediately after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game. When the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the situation in which the special figure 1 has the reserved memory at the time when the latent state is set and the special figure 2 does not have the reserved memory is likely to occur. In this state, if the player interrupts the game (restroom break), the lottery of Special Figure 1 is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved memories during the latent state, and the special figure 1 is executed during the latent state. There was a problem that the jackpot in FIG. 1 was won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, if there is a reserved ball in the special figure 1, the right-handed game is promptly executed and the ball is sent to the second entrance 640. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect of prompting the player to enter the ball and win a small hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery and prevent the player from being provided with a big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player in the latent state.

First, referring to FIG. 7 (b), in the case of shifting to the latent state after the end of the big hit game, when there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the end of the big hit game (at the end (ED)) (0 pieces). The flow of the display contents of the effect executed in (Case) will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is held at the time of entering the ending (ED) period (see FIG. 7 (b) A) set after the end of the last round game executed during the jackpot game. If it is determined that there is no special figure 1 hold (0) by the determination, the special figure is in the latent state based on the special figure 1 hold stored by the end of the jackpot game. 1 Since the fluctuation is not (difficult to be) executed, the display mode (for super mode) indicating that the latent state (super mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game. ED) is displayed. Then, at the end of the ED period (see FIG. 7 (b) B), that is, when the jackpot game ends and the special figure change (special figure change in the latent state) is executed, there is no special figure 1 reserved ball. Displays a display mode of a super mode (a mode corresponding to the latent state) as a display mode indicating the latent state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), when it is determined that there are (three) reserved balls in Special Figure 1 at the time of entering the ending ED period of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (c) A), the ED is determined. A display mode (ED for dash) for prompting the player to promptly execute the right-handed game during the period is displayed. Then, if the special figure 1 reserved ball exists at the end of the ED period, that is, at the time when the jackpot game ends and the special figure change (special figure change in the latent state) is executed, the player is promptly notified. The display mode of the dash mode is displayed as the display mode for executing the right-handed game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, the condition for executing the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) is satisfied in advance during the latent probability state (latent). In order to prevent the game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed during the jackpot game in which the probability state is set), the special figure 2 fluctuation (when there is a special figure 1 hold). The display mode (display mode for encouraging the right-handed game) for actively executing the lottery) is configured to be displayed from the ED period of the jackpot game. As a result, the special figure 2 variation (lottery) can be executed immediately after the game in the latent state is started, and the special figure 1 variation (lottery) being executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 2 variation (lottery) can be executed. The lottery) can be forcibly stopped (discarded). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) during the latent state, and it is possible to provide the game in which the player is less likely to feel unpleasant.

Next, the display contents displayed during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during ED when the reserved ball of special figure 1 is present at the start of the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, a rabbit character 811 and a turtle character 814 are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, a specific character (characters 811, 814) is configured to be displayed on the display screen. With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline (advantage) of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 or the character 814 is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 6A, a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) in a state where the normal state is set, and as a jackpot game, the left variable winning device 65 (first attacker) shown in FIG. 2 is used. It shows an example of the ending screen when the open operation round game is executed twice (2 rounds) and the "2R latent jackpot" in which the latent state is set after the big hit game is executed is executed. be. In this "2R latent jackpot", in order to execute a left-handed game to make the first attacker win a ball during the jackpot game, a round game is being performed (the second round game is performed after the jackpot game is started). During the period until the end), a "left-handed" comment is displayed in the display area Dm3. Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the reserved ball of the special figure 1 exists at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game, the guidance display mode of “right-handed” is displayed in the display area Dm3. At the same time, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Hurry up and hit the right and finish before the turtle !!" is displayed in order to encourage the right-handed game. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to play a right-handed game in a hurry (during the ending period). That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, since the game before the big hit is won and the big hit game are both left-handed games, the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is played. The latent state is set while the value remains 0, and there is a possibility that only the special figure 1 lottery (variation) will be executed during the latent state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a game (left) for causing the player to acquire the reserved ball of the special figure 2 at a time point before the latent state is set (ending period of the jackpot game). Since it is configured to display the display mode for encouraging the hitting game), it is possible to shorten the period from the setting of the latent probability state to the execution of the special figure 2 variation (lottery). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, a special figure 1 big hit game) during the latent state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the holding suggestion display mode for suggesting the current number of holding balls is displayed in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e. Here, the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e are display areas in which the hold suggestion display mode for suggesting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is displayed, and specifically, the number of hold balls is 1. , Dm4a to Dm4b, Dm4a to Dm4c when the number of reserved balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4d when the number of reserved balls is 3, and Dm4a to Dm4e when the number of reserved balls is 4. The hold suggestion display mode is formed as described above. Then, the character "GOAL" is displayed in the small display area Dm4a, and when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes "0", the effect that the character 811 reaches the goal is executed. In this way, in the dash mode having playability for the purpose of setting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 to 0, the player can visually discriminate the process of subtracting the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1. By configuring it so as to be, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect. In FIG. 6A, the small display area Dm1a is "3", that is, since the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 3, the display areas Dm4a to the display area Dm4d are lit and displayed. Further, in the display area Dm1 where the fourth symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, the jackpot symbol "555" corresponding to the running jackpot game shows the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the display area Dm2 on which the fourth symbol for the purpose is displayed, the symbol "246" for indicating that the previous lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order is displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, the symbol "246" is displayed. The character "100" is used as a prize ball display mode to indicate the number of prize balls acquired in this big hit game (2R latent jackpot), and the small display area Dm6 is used to notify the progress of the big hit game. The characters "Round END" are displayed.

Next, the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 holding ball is present at the time when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball exists at the time when the latent probability state is set, as shown in FIG. 6B, the dash mode is performed even in the latent probability state. Is configured to be set continuously. During the latent state, it is configured to be advantageous to the player to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game and execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Then, if a big hit or a small hit is won with the second special symbol, the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the deviation. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the first special symbol is better than the second special symbol when the fluctuation time is also in the latent state. Since a long fluctuation time is set, it is extremely rare that the first special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player during the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

However, if the player does not execute the right-handed game when only the first special symbol has the number of reserved balls after the transition to the latent state, the change time of the first special symbol elapses and the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. There was a possibility that it would end up. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit, the dash mode for promptly executing the right-handed game by the player is not the super mode displayed in the latent state. Is displayed, and an effect for digesting the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed.

In FIG. 7B, a rabbit-like character 811 and a turtle-like character 814 are competing for GOAL812 in the center of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the center of the display screen. The comment "Hurry up and hit right !!" is displayed. Further, the guidance display mode of "right-handed" is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. By displaying the display mode for guiding the right-handed hit in both the sub-display area Ds and the small display area Dm3 in this way, the player can emphasize and notify the right-handed game. In addition, by changing the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to an appropriate game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continuously execute the disadvantageous game. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the small display area Dm2a indicates the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The state in which two are acquired is displayed. Further, the small display area Dm1a indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, a lighting display indicating that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 is displayed in the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b.

Returning to FIG. 7 (c), the explanation will be continued. The dash mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and the production is switched to the super mode corresponding to the latent state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7A, a display screen indicating the end of the dash mode will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcedly stopped in the off symbol, and the dash mode is set. By winning a small hit with the 2nd special symbol during the latent state, it ends when the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol becomes 0, and the player is shown to be in the latent state in the super mode. It becomes a display mode.

In the center of the main display area Dm, it is displayed that the character 811 imitating a rabbit competing in the dash mode passes through GOAL812 before the character 814 imitating a turtle. Then, the comment "GOAL !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the dash mode has ended.

Then, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and at the same time, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "357" indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Further, the upper display area Dm4a is lit and displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has disappeared, and the dash mode is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol and the execution of the special figure 1 change is forcibly stopped (discarding the special figure 1 change), the lottery of the first special symbol is made. The display area Dm1 for displaying the result is configured to stop the forced off symbol "357" instead of the actual lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the discarded special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) It is preferable to configure the display mode so that the result (lottery result) can be suggested (notified) to the player so that the out-of-design symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the color of the out-of-design symbol "357" displayed in the display area Dm1 is changed. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery so that it can be suggested to the player. Specifically, when the display mode of "357" is displayed in red, it indicates that the lottery result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery is "big hit", and when it is displayed in rainbow color. Is a "big hit" that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is the smallest, and the latent state is not set after the big hit game is completed. ) ”. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded and is out of order, and the lottery result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the privilege given by discarding the special figure 1 lottery. Further, instead of the display mode in the display area Dm1, the stop display mode of the third symbol of the main display area Dm and the display mode for showing the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game are changed to be discarded. FIG. 1 The result of the lottery may be suggested (notified), or may be suggested (notified) by using a voice output means or a light emitting means. With such a configuration, the player can get a sense of security that he / she was able to prevent the player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot. Further, when the look-ahead result is a big hit, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, and it is possible to further enhance the staging effect.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high normal symbol). Three game states can be set: a probability state), a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, and a low probability state of a normal symbol), and the type of jackpot won and the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that a predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14). The plurality of gaming states set here are configured so that the degree of advantage to the player is different, and the latent probability state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

First, a case where a normal state is set as a game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 9) has been operated in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 51)) is executed. ) Is set as the normal state.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if jackpot A (71% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the probability changes after the jackpot game ends. When the state (challenge mode) is set and the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) or the jackpot C (4% of the jackpot win) is set, the latent state (super mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot winning), and the submarine is hidden after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the correct state (super mode) is set.

That is, in the normal state, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a 71% chance of entering the challenge mode (probability change state) and a 29% chance of entering the super mode (potential state). Further, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the super mode (latent state) is set with a 100% probability. In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is executed during the normal state, the variation time for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, in reality, the game (right-handed game) for executing the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is not performed. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is configured to be set to a long-time fluctuation regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set, or the fluctuation when the jackpot is won (big hit). A short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set only for the fluctuation). Here, in the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of big hits (the number of big hits after winning the big hit (first hit) in the normal state) reaches 3 times (including the first hit) (when the limit number is reached). Because the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the limit number of times is reached while the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed is set, FIG. 2 The normal state may be set with the hold acquired. Even in such a case, the special figure acquired during the latent state is configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set. 2 The hold can be smoothly digested (execution of lottery). Furthermore, when the jackpot of the special figure 2 lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the latent state is higher with a higher probability (100% in this embodiment) than when the jackpot of the special figure 1 lottery is won. Since it is set, it is possible to smoothly execute a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game is improved. Can be done.

Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state when the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the left-handed game is executed while the probability change state is set, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed. Then, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 during the probability change state, if jackpot A (60% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type, the probability change state (challenge mode) after the jackpot game ends. ) Is set to loop. Further, when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot winning) are set, the latent state (super mode) is set.

Further, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold, the big hit D (100% of the big hit win) is set as the big hit type. It is configured so that the probability change state is set again after the jackpot game is completed.

In other words, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability change state, the probability change state (challenge mode) is set to loop with a probability of 60%, and the latent state (super mode) is set with a probability of 40%. Will be done. Then, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability change state is set with a 100% probability. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the latent state based on the jackpot winning when the probabilistic state is set than when the normal state is set. As a result, the degree of expectation for shifting to the latent state can be gradually increased, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (3 times), the normal state is forcibly set after the end of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot is forcibly set during the normal state. The rate of transition to the latent state is higher when the jackpot is won in the normal state and the jackpot is won during the probable change state, which is transferred when the jackpot does not shift to the latent state. Even if is set high, the player will not be given excessive benefits.

Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state in the state where the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game is performed. Then, when a big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, if the big hit D (100% of the big hit winning) is set as the type of the big hit, the latent state is set again after the end of the big hit game.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, when the big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, when the big hit A (60% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the big hit. After the game is over, the probability change state is set, and when the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot win) are set, the latent state (super mode) is set again after the jackpot game is over. Set.

In other words, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent probability state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a 40% probability, the probability change state is set with a 60% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery is performed. If you win the jackpot with, there is a 100% chance that you will loop the latent state (super mode). Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure variation executed during the latent state is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Therefore, during the latent state, the right-handed game aiming at the special figure 2 lottery is an advantageous game method for the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 lottery, a small hit is won in a part of the case where the big hit is not won. If this small hit is won, a small hit game in which the amount of benefits that can be given to the player is smaller than that of the big hit is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit (about 1/2) in the special figure 2 lottery is set higher than the probability of winning a big hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set, the right-handed game can be played, and the small hit game can be executed a plurality of times until the big hit is won. With this configuration, even if the period during which the special figure 2 lottery does not win the big hit (the period during which the lottery results other than the big hit are continuously obtained) becomes longer during the latent state, many small hits are made accordingly. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, can be reliably looped by executing the lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the number of big hits reaches three times, the normal state is always set after the third big hit game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot type that shifts to the latent state at the first jackpot is won, the special figure 2 game in which the jackpot D, which is the most advantageous to the player, is always executed can be executed for the next two jackpots.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the latent probability state is set, that is, the execution of the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is defined as an appropriate gaming method. If the special figure 2 game is executed during the current game state and the jackpot is won, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player will be set, and there is a risk that the player will be given excessive benefits. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently in the normal state, so that the player in the normal state is given an excessive privilege (a privilege to set an advantageous gaming state). It can be suppressed.

In addition, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the proper game (left-handed game) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, the player It is possible to prevent an excessive privilege (a privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) from being given to the player.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than in the state in which the normal state is set, and the ball is placed at the second entry port 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult to enter the ball, it is difficult to execute the special figure 2 lottery, but it is not limited to this, and when the probability change state is set, it is higher than the state where the normal state is set. , Set the jackpot probability of the special symbol to a high probability, and make it easier to execute the new special figure 2 lottery (so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the special figure 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the state in which the probability variation state is set is higher than the state in which the normal state is set. It may be configured so that the time set as the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, 3 minutes).

With this configuration, when the probabilistic state is set, a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn with the aim of shifting to the latent probable state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) does not shift to the latent state, but by executing many special symbol lottery, the second special symbol (special symbol) aims to see various variable effects (big hit effects). The player can select the game (right-handed game) in which the lottery is performed in 2).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. The hit type counter C5, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area corresponding to entry into the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2, which are composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to entry into the second entrance 640 consisting of 203a and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and the first 1 In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop are performed according to the timing of entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the small hit is also made in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the start opening (upper first entry slot 64b1, lower first entry opening 64b2, second entry) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values acquired by the ball entering the mouth 640), and is required among the acquired counter values when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied. By configuring the special symbol lottery to be executed using only the values, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits). , Parts and technologies can be standardized, and costs can be reduced.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It has a configuration to hold and store the value, but is not limited to this, and does not provide a function (hold storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 11A. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 8" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, small hits or misses).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 3" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a determination value other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 2/458 (1/227), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 4/458 (1/109). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of special symbols are prepared, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is the small hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that is the small hit specified in, it is judged as a small hit of the special symbol.

Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a small hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined regardless of the probability state and the high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the value of the first special symbol is small in the lottery. It is stipulated that you will not win a prize.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "112 to 342". That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (not won), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 224/458 (about 1/2). It is stipulated to be 1).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are different. It is configured so that in one process of executing a special symbol lottery (a process of determining whether or not there is a hit), a big hit hit / fail judgment and a small hit win / fail judgment are continuously (simultaneously) executed. is doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and the table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table 202b) are displayed. Although it is configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and a large hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be executed using one table. In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of counter values for winning small hits for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol, and the jackpot according to the determination value predetermined in advance according to the determined value. It is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big hit winnings or the number of small hit winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The first hit random number counter C1 value specified as a big hit winning or a small winning winning may be configured to be variable, or a big hit lottery or a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery, a data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit are not specified may be provided.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are executed. There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the jackpot is not won at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win a big hit, the lottery of special symbols should be executed by referring to the dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the big hit but only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It may be configured.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. At the same timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. As described above, the jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random number value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the normal state, and a probability variation / latent probability table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the probabilistic state or the latent state. Is included at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 13, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a table in which the gaming state is referred to in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 13, the normal table 202d1 has a plurality of types of special symbols won in the jackpot (special figures 1 and 2) and the acquired values of the first hit type counter C2 in association with each other. The jackpot type is specified.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 70". In the range of "71 to 95", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "96 to 99", "big hit C" is defined. Further, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", and "big hit D" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members executed during the jackpot game (opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 and left variable winning). The operation contents (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 of the device 65 and the switching member 650h) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario in which the operation contents (timing, number of times) are defined in time series.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, the operation contents of each movable member during the jackpot game in which a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and switching member 650h) are moved are timed. By using the open operation scenario specified in the series, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and in the case where a defect occurs in one movable member, the other It is possible to smoothly execute the motion processing for the movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 2 rounds and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for 2 rounds. This is the type of jackpot in which the game is executed. In this round game 1, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds as one round game. It is a round game to make you.

When "Big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to ON) after the big hit game is completed, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the high probability state of the special symbol is set). Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit A" is executed, the probability change state is set.

In "Big hit B", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds as a big hit game, and the big hit game in which the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is opened is executed during the 16 rounds. ..

When the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to off) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "big hit B" is executed, the latent state is set. During the latent state, as will be described in detail later, the jackpot type selected when the special figure 2 game is executed and the jackpot is won is selected with a 100% probability of "big hit D", which is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot game is completed, the "big hit B" in which the latent probability state is set is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

"Big hit C" is a big hit game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is a round, and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds. Is the type of jackpot that is executed.

When the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to off) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (Probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the latent state is set. Therefore, the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A", and since the number of rounds is small, the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the "big hit B".

In other words, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the normal state is set as the gaming state, there is a 71% probability of winning the jackpot game (“big hit A”) that is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured to win a jackpot game (“big hit B” or “big hit C”) that is disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 29%.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot advantageous to the player is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds is executed, and the game is played. If a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won, the jackpot game that opens the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 for 16 rounds is configured to be executed, so the type of jackpot that was won this time is advantageous. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the game is a big hit during the jackpot game, but the case is not limited to this, and the case where the player wins the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the case where the player wins the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. Then, it may be configured to execute a jackpot game in which the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65) is opened.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous depending on the game content of the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game It is possible to predict what the game state is set after the end until just before the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, each winning device (opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player). The contents of operation control of the opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 65f1 and opening / closing door 650f1) are the same so that the first attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open or closed state, and the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is supported. In the opening operation scenario, the operation control content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area is specified as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, and in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h is specified. As the motion control content for the above, the motion control content may be configured to specify the motion control content that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area.

Further, the operation control content of the switching member 650h is made the same in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first). The opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 65f1, opening / closing door 650f1) may be configured to have different timings for controlling the operation so that the attacker 65 and the second attacker 650) are in the open or closed state. By varying the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Therefore, the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and the jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area may be configured to be feasible.

Since the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "big hit B" is executed in "big hit D", detailed explanation of the contents of the jackpot game is omitted, but "big hit D" is selected only by the lottery of the second special symbol. It differs from the jackpot B in that it is different from the jackpot B, and since the latent state is set after the jackpot game of "big hit D" is completed, it is the most advantageous jackpot game for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the big hit game is set is set according to the type of the special symbol won in the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit winning. Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of jackpots is not limited to three, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the contents specified in the probability variation / latency table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability change / latency table 202d2. The probabilistic / latent probability table 202d2 is a table in which the gaming state is referred to in the probabilistic change state or the latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 14A, the probability variation / latent probability table 202d2 includes the types of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) that won the jackpot and the values of the acquired first hit type counter C2. In association with, multiple jackpot types are specified.

The probabilistic / latent probability table 202d2 differs from the normal table 202d1 in that the gaming state is referred to in the probabilistic state or the latent probability state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), "big hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 59", and "big hit B" is defined in the range of "60 to 84". Is specified, and the range of "85 to 99" is different in that "big hit C" is specified.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0 to 0). In 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball into the second entry port 640. ..

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type of small hit (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table 202 g.

Here, the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). In this small hit type selection table 202g, two types of small hit types are defined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, "small hit A" is defined in the range of the acquired small hit type counter value of "0 to 49", and "small hit B" is specified in the range of "50 to 99". ..

In the present embodiment, as described above, the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by a missed symbol according to the small hit type. is doing. Specifically, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped and "small". If it is "Hit B", it will be forcibly stopped due to the disconnection.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is a change that indicates a big hit when the special figure 2 game is being executed during the latent probability state, in the present embodiment, it is the first. 2 Since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of 1/2 in the lottery of special symbols, it prevents the player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot by temporarily stopping or forcibly stopping with a missed symbol. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are two types of small hits to be won, but two or less types may be used, or three or more types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to provide a small hit type in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol does not stop, to give the player a more thrilling feeling, and to provide various playability. can.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and different small hit types (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit. When the content) is set, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for each type of special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state where a normal state is set as a game state, and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state where a probability change state is set. And the latency table 202e3 used in the state where the latency state is set are specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". Various normal reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time are associated with the range of "51 to 100", and super reach A per 30 seconds of fluctuation time is associated with the range of "51 to 100". Super reach B per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range, and super reach C per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range of "151 to 198".

In addition, the lottery result is "off", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" with a short deviation of 8 seconds, and the variation time is in the range of "51 to 70". Is specified by associating a long deviation of 12 seconds with a deviation of 20 seconds in the range of "71 to 150", and is specified by associating a normal reach with a deviation of 30 seconds in the range of "151 to 170". Super reach A is associated and defined, and a deviation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "171 to 198" in association with super reach B.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball is made to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1 during the normal state. It is configured so that a game, that is, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol is executed is performed.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 18A. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18A, the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is " The range of "0 to 99" defines the normal fluctuation per 10 seconds of the fluctuation time, and the range of "100 to 198" defines the super fluctuation per 20 seconds of the fluctuation time. Further, in the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is defined in the entire range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. (Hit fluctuation, small hit fluctuation, missed fluctuation) are stipulated.

As described above, in the probabilistic state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than in the normal state. Further, it is configured so that the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficult) during the probabilistic state. Therefore, once the state changes to the probabilistic state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested in a short period of time.

Further, the fluctuation time (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. By configuring and grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Next, the contents of the latency table 202e3 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latency table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17B, the latent probability table 202e3 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1. , If the fluctuation pattern (hit long fluctuation, missed long fluctuation) of 10 minutes is specified and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (hit short fluctuation, small hit short fluctuation, missed short fluctuation) is specified.

As a result, unlike other gaming states, the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to set the game state (that is, the special figure 2 game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the big hit or the small hit is won by the change of the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. In this way, during the latent state, the first special symbol has only a 10-minute fluctuation pattern, and the second special symbol has a 1-second variation pattern, so that the first special symbol will almost certainly change. Can be forcibly stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to have only a 10-minute variation pattern, but a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds or the like) may be executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various game features such as whether or not it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 game.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (c). FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal symbol in the range of "0 to 10", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 by using the acquired value of the normal map variation type counter CS2. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198". Will be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured and set to be variable based on the game state of the normal symbol and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the lower first entry port 64b2 differs depending on the fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 52) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 50) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time saving It has a flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small hit flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

In the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment), balls enter the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (starting prize). It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the above. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry opening 640 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), The values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (starting prize), the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are connected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold is performed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is normally used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Fluctuation display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning of the ball entry port 64b1, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the display effect) up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is a value of each of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing. (Refer to S210 in FIG. 30) or refer to in the second special symbol change start processing (S212 in FIG. 36), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIGS. 48 and S2005).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol. When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol, and when it is off, it is in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. It shows that there is. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S813 in FIG. 34 and S1510 in FIG. 42). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability variation number counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of big hits after the big hit game. In the present embodiment, when the number of big hits reaches three, the normal state is set after the third big hit game is completed, regardless of which big hit type is won. This probability variation number counter 203h is added until the value reaches the upper limit value of 2 after the jackpot game ends (S2704 in FIG. 55), and is reset to 0 when the value reaches the upper limit value of 2 (FIG. 55). S2703). The probability variation counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

In this embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter is added at the end of the big hit, but it may be added at the start of the big hit game. Further, although the upper limit value is set to 2, it is not limited to this, and may be 2 or less or 3 or more. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide various playability.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped when the lottery result is a small hit A (S1604 in FIG. 43), and the special symbol is set to on. It is referred to in the variation processing (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 29). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203i of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 33) that it is set to on (S701: Yes in FIG. 33), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 33).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit game). (Based on the execution), the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol and the variable display of the other special symbol are temporarily stopped. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit (small hit game). It is configured to stop until it finishes) or when it comes off.

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on when the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped when the lottery result is the jackpot B (S832 in FIG. 35), and the special symbol change. It is referred to in the process (see FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). When it is set to ON in the process of S204, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 29). S205). That is, while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203j of the special figure 2 is set to on. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 41) that it is set to on (S1401: Yes in FIG. 41), it is set to off (S1403 in FIG. 41).

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (probability change flag 203 g and time reduction flag 203 m setting status). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203m is set to off, and the probability change state is set when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203m is set to on. It is stored, and the latent probability state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203m is set to off.

Further, in the state where the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, the hit game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed, and the executed big hit game. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The time saving flag 203m is a flag for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and is set to ON when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. The time saving flag 203m is set to ON after the jackpot game is completed, corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S2706 in FIG. 55). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is set to off. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next big hit is won. The configuration is not limited, and for example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit winning), or a predetermined lottery result. When the number of times (for example, a small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, or the number of lottery of each symbol lottery may be When the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned end conditions to be different depending on the winning jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol will continue when the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set.

The jackpot flag 203n has a value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" is set as the jackpot flag 203n for the first special symbol, and "01" is set as the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203n is set as off.

Here, the jackpot flag 203n is configured so that the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol can be discriminated separately. If either one of the second special symbol is set to ON first, even if the lottery result of the other is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON. ..

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), Depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol is used, but the present invention is limited to this. No, a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203n is turned on when one of the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is won. In the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203n set to on, the jackpot may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot A or the jackpot C of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variable display, and is a variable display of the second special symbol. It is set to ON when the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S212 of FIG. 36).

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 53) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29) is the special symbol variation processing (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 29). Is configured to skip.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to be turned on when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203p is set to on when the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and when the special symbol fluctuation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1608 in FIG. 43).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is determined (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S208: Yes in FIG. 29), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S208: Yes in FIG. 29). (See S209 in FIG. 34) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S212: Yes in FIG. 29), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212: Yes in FIG. 29) for stopping the second special symbol being changed ( (See S213 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing to drive the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 50) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the restart variation pattern selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

When the restart variation pattern selection table 222b receives a command indicating the restart of the temporarily stopped special symbol, the "remaining time A", "remaining time B", and "remaining time C" are displayed from the remaining time information storage area from the remaining time. Select a detailed restart variation pattern based on the remaining time stored. As a result, by reselecting the restart fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern that has been temporarily stopped, it is possible to provide a more comfortable game.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (b). As shown in FIG. 20B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, right-handed flag 223j, slave state setting area 223k, special figure 1 provisional A stop flag 223m, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the main control device. When the variation display in the special symbol is executed in 110 and the reserved ball number is subtracted, the voice lamp control device issues a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction. Send to 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is in the latent state and the display reserved ball number command is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number is set in the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e. It is controlled to light up and display accordingly. With this configuration, it is possible to convey the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The right-handed flag 223j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more when a jackpot ending command is received. On the other hand, it is set to off when the hold ball number command is received and the value is determined to be 0 during the latent probability state.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to on when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 restart command is issued. Set to off when received.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to on when the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 2 restart command is issued. Set to off when received.

The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of the change of the special symbol that is temporarily stopped. Remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol variation display is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p, and the variation display of the temporarily stopped special symbol is displayed. The remaining period information stored when setting the restart effect when restarting is referred to.

The dash end flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining when the latent probability state is set becomes 0 and the dash mode ends, and the first special symbol is reserved. Set to on when the ball count command is a command indicating 0. On the other hand, it is set to off when the confirmation command of the fluctuation is received.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In FIG. 22, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 22 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 22 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 23 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 23B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 24 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 23, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 24 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 24B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 24 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 24 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 23 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) excluding FIG. 24 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 24A to 24B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 24 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and 24 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to (c) and 24 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 26).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, in the example of FIG. 26). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 27) that describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 27) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 56. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 45.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the temporary stop flag 203i in FIG. 1 is set to ON (S202), and then ON. If it is determined that the setting is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to on (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on (S202: No). S204). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S204: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the temporary stop special figure is updated (S205). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the temporary stop flag 203j in FIG. 2 is not on (that is, off), the present process is terminated as it is (S204: No).

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the small hit A. In the present embodiment, while the small hit A game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot B. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not updated while the jackpot B is set, and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during that period. It is configured so that the aspect is not updated.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed with the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the special symbol change during execution disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the lights are repeatedly turned off, or the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, the lights are turned on and off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals). Flashing display mode) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be capable of displaying a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during the temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203r of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S206: Yes), the process of executing the variation of the first special symbol is executed (. S207).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S207), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S207 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S207) is 0 (S208), and S208. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S208: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to the process of S211 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. If it is determined in the processing of S208 that the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S208: No), the processing of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S211.

On the other hand, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (0) (S206: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S210). In this first special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S210), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S208: No) in the process of S208, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S211 to S215) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (0) (S211: No), it means that the special figure 2 is not currently changing. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S212) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S212), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S212), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S212), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203n (or the small hit flag 203p) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S211 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is currently changing in special figure 2 (S211: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S213). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but the processing having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S213) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S214), and if it is determined to be 0 (S214). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S215), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S206 to S210) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S211 to S215) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start processing (S210), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S210).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), S401 is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 11A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a) is used. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 per unit matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol for which the jackpot has been won, in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203n is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is on (S502). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probabilistic state (high probability of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol). The probability change flag 203g is turned on to set the probability change state after the end of the jackpot when it is determined in the process of S2705 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 55) that the winning jackpot type is the jackpot A (S2705: Yes). It is set to. Then, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), since the current gaming state is the normal state, it is acquired from the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1. Based on the first hit type counter CS2, the current jackpot type is determined (S503). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S502 that the time saving flag 203m is on (S502: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the probability variation jackpot type selection table 202d2, The type of jackpot this time is determined (S504). On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203n is off), it is not necessary to determine the big hit type, so the processing of S502 to S504 is skipped. , S505.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type to be won is set to be different based on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, so that the player always enjoys the game while being excited about which jackpot type to win. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot.

After the processing of any of S501, S503, and S504 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S505) and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probable change state) corresponding to the information is read out (S506).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S508).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S509), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S510), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 (S511), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation executing process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change execution processing (S207). In this first special symbol change execution process (S205), a process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and a special interrupted due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol change execution processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, if a small hit is won with one special symbol, the small hit type is small hit A, and the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period. (The period from the winning of the small hit to the end of the small hit game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small hit game of one. Further, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to determine whether the change of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded depending on the winning small hit type, the player wins which small hit type. You can enjoy the game while wondering.

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. ..

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 29 S104) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 milliseconds. (See S205 in FIG. 31) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (1 subtracted) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S207 in FIG. 32). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON in the processing of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined. This is the process that is executed when it has passed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C. (S802). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S812.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, a special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 of FIG. 34), will be described. In this special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), when the process of stopping the change of the first special symbol is executed, when the change result is the jackpot B, the change of the second special symbol is interrupted. Execute the process.

In the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S831). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to suspend (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Since there is no such thing, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S831 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S832). , A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is turned on is set (S833), and this processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the second special symbol is restarted again after the jackpot game is completed. ing. With this configuration, the jackpot type this time can provide a game that is intriguing to the player, whether the change of the second special symbol is interrupted or is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped when the jackpot B is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to temporarily stop when a specific result is obtained. good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of excitement that he / she does not know when the other special symbol will be temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 34, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S802, if it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C (S802: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S806).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S807), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S808, next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is set to ON (S809), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S809 :). Yes), in order to apply the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S807 described above, the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol was turned off. It is set (S810), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S811), and the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, in the process of S809, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S810 and 811 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S812.

In the processing of S812, first, the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol change is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability change flag 203g, and the time saving flag 203m corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off (S812). S813), information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k (S814). The game state storage area 203k is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, latent state) and the game state related to the winning game (big hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S811, the game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S814 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S815), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S816), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S814 is skipped and the above-mentioned S815 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), the process (S812 to S816) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S807). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) ( S405: Yes) in FIG. 31 may be configured so that the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. In the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol to the player. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S212).

When the second special symbol change start process (S212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 29)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), if the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is thereafter. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o set to on, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is turned on without limitation. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S909 Is executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S909, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S210 in FIG. 30) from S301 to S307. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. When the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the process of, and the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. do.

This special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) is a processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but if the lottery result is out of order, the same process as the process of S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation processing (S1009).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), first, is the lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 36)) a small hit? Is determined (S1101).

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that a small hit has been won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). ), Next, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1009 in FIG. 38) executed as one process of the second special symbol change start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), that is, the change of the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203x to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36). The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be described.

When the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is executed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 of FIG. 37).

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. However, for example, a plurality of types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small hit type can be set, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303 are provided. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing of.

After finishing the processing of S1303, the variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 are used for small hits. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) of is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) of the case where the lottery result is out of order is executed. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read (S1307), the variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and the special variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S213), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S213). The process for updating the change of the second special symbol is executed, and when the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the change is executed.

In the second special symbol change execution processing (S213), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on (S1401). Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the temporary stop flag 203j is on, that is, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), the special figure 2 for restarting the fluctuation of the second special symbol The restart command is set (S1402), the temporary stop flag 203j of the special figure 2 is set to off (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (S1401: No), since the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to S1404.

After executing the process of S1401 or S1403, next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 33). , The point that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit was changed, the point that the process of setting the flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol was omitted, and the point that the lottery result this time is a big hit When it is determined that the above is not the case (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1514) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508) corresponds to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than a big hit (small hit or miss). The stop process is executed, and the process of canceling (forced stop) the fluctuation of the first special symbol or temporarily stopping is executed according to the winning small hit type.

When the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and when it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON. (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type won this time is small hit A (S1602). When it is determined that the small hit type won this time is small hit A (S1602: Yes), a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1603). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S1604), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is turned on. Special figure 1 Temporary stop command is set (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), since the first special symbol is not changing, the processing of S1604 to S1605 is skipped and the processing of S1607 is performed. Move to.

In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, and the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) when the change of the second special symbol is stopped according to the winning small hit type. ) Or forcibly stop when it comes off. As described above, when the winning small hit type is small hit A, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special figure 1 temporary stop command is sent to the main process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 52). It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in (see). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is provided. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the command is output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the winning small hit type is not A (that is, it is small hit B), the special figure 1 cancellation processing (S1606) is executed, and S1607 Move to processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), which is one of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processes (S1514 in FIG. 43), will be described. In this special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), when the process of stopping the change of the second special symbol is executed, when the change result is the small hit B, the change of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Executes the processing of.

In the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not a value larger than 0 (S1651: No), it is not necessary to forcibly stop the first special symbol, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1651 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1652). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 described later. Then, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the disengagement stop mode is shown to indicate that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been forcibly stopped due to disengagement. Is set for displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and is output to the display control device 114.

Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process proceeds to S1656. In the process of S1656, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 1 is on (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is off (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (S1657), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not on (S1656: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit B is won in the special figure 2 game, the execution special figure 1 fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player during the latent game and spoiling the interest of the game, and it is possible to provide a safe game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol shows a jackpot symbol (big hit symbol) or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. It is configured to stop and display with a missed symbol, but it is not limited to that, and depending on the winning big hit type and small hit type, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or variable display is performed with the measurement of the fluctuation time interrupted. It is composed. With this configuration, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player can perform the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it has not disappeared, and it is possible to play a big hit game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) determines whether or not a ball has entered (starting winning) in any of the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. , Up to the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in total for the upper 1st entrance 64b1 and lower 1st entrance 64b2, maximum 4 for the 2nd entrance 640) when the start prize is won. This is a process of storing the counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the upper first entry opening 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, which is the first starting opening (starting winning). (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. It is determined that the ball has entered the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is acquired (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, is the number of reserved balls for the upper first ball slot 64b1 or the lower first ball slot 64b2 less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, is the number of reserved balls stored up to the upper limit? ) Is determined. When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the ball has not entered the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 (S1701: No), or in the processing of S1703, the upper first ball is at present. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the 1 incoming ball opening 64b1 or the lower 1st incoming ball opening 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is skipped and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit and the ball is inserted into the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, added value can be added. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit and the ball enters the upper first entry slot 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, the motivation for playing is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Next, for each process from S1708 to S1714, the ball wins the first starting port (upper first ball entry port 64b1 or lower first ball entry port 64b2) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. Since the same processing as the processing performed on the second ball entry port 640 is different only in that the processing is performed on the second entrance 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 46), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit A first winning command indicating the winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of order in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the omission is set. (S1825), this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail determination. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the second look-ahead process (S1714). In the second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 47), the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46) causes a ball to enter the first starting port (upper first entry port 64b1 or lower first entry port 64b2). While the process is to determine (look ahead) the pending data (winning information) based on the ball (starting prize) in advance and make various judgments, the target to be judged is the starting prize at the first starting opening. The only difference is that the winning information based on the above is changed to the winning information based on the start winning at the second starting opening (second entrance 640), and the other details are the same because the same processing is executed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used. The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to on. (S2008: Yes) acquires a hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11 (c)) for high probability, and proceeds to the process of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S2008: No), the hit / fail determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the lower first entry port 64b2 differs depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) defines a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds (usually). The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2, so that ball. Is configured so that the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a different fluctuation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f). When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified as 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified. A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2 (through gate 67). Since the normal symbol fluctuation (30 second fluctuation) is being executed (1.6 seconds after passing), the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the lower first entry port 64b2. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entry port 64b2 ( Since the game is executed per normal figure (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 according to the length of the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the lower first entry opening 64b2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S2015), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high probability state of the above is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 64a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 64a is long open (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a. As a result, the electric accessory 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, when it is determined whether the time saving flag 203m is on (S2018) and the time saving flag 203m is not on (off), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No), as an opening pattern for a low-probability state of a normal symbol, an opening pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes opening for 0.7 seconds once is set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , It is configured to open the electric accessory 64a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (lower). The period in which the first ball entry port 64b2 is open is longer).

Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 64a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 64a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 64a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a may be set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2002: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103). , S2106.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a latent probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating a firing abnormality is made. A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. can.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into a right-handed region. May be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2103 to S2105, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2107).

If it is determined in the process of S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a normal symbol holding ball number counter (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is normal. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S2312 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 52), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 29) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 52), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 is executed (S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In this jackpot control process (S2404), the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 65 are used for each round of the jackpot state. The device 650 (hereinafter referred to as a winning opening, etc.) has been opened, and the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65) has elapsed. , Right variable winning device 650) determines whether a specified number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning openings and the like (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning openings and the like (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the small hit control process related to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small hit control process (S2405), the period for opening the V winning opening 650a and the period for closing the V winning opening 650a are set in advance for the right variable winning device 650 which is opened during the small hit game (S2405). The process for setting based on the small hit scenario) is executed. The detailed contents of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) is completed. In addition, the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 34). In the display mode set in S507 of (see), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (disengaged symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401, and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2409, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2415), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If so, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 54, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, and switching). The operation process of the member 650h) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53), will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is used for a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is executed for a first attacker (right variable winning device 650) and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) as a jackpot game. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation, and the above-mentioned processing of S2642 is performed among the round games that open the first attacker (right variable winning device 650). It is specified only in the open operation scenario corresponding to the round game of the first round. Therefore, when executing other round games, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k is opened in the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not specified, so the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 55), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 (S2506). When it is determined that the operation timing is set (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round (the second round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2512), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2511), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), the value of the probability variation counter is updated, the high probability state of the special symbol is set according to the winning jackpot type, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set based on the winning jackpot type. Is executed.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is 3 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the probability change number counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), the probability change number is the upper limit of 3, so the probability change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m are set to off (S2702), and the probability change is changed. The value of the count counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the probability change state or the latent probability state is set up to 3 times after the end of the big hit game, and the game state becomes the normal state when the number of times reaches 3 times. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can change the probability up to 3 times or enjoy the latent probability game with peace of mind. In the present embodiment, the number of probable changes is set to 3 times, but the number is not limited to this, and may be set to 5 times or updated randomly. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a wide variety of playability.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2701 that the value of the probability variation counter 203h is not 3 (that is, 2 or less), it is not the timing when the probability variation ends, so the value of the probability variation counter 203h is added by 1. (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type won this time is A (S2705). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is A (S2705: Yes), in order to set the probability change state as the game state, the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), and the above-mentioned S2709 Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S2707) and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on in order to set the latent probability state as the game state (S2707). S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S2405). This small hit control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and is for executing various effects according to the small hit when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of the special symbol. It is a process for setting information (command) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process (S2405), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the small hit (S2801). If it is the timing to start the small hit (S2801: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2802), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the small hit (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S2803). When it is determined that the player is not in the small hit (S2803: Yes), it is not necessary to execute the control for the small hit, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the opening operation of the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). When it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the release solenoid is set to be turned on (S2805), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to off (S2807), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S2806: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 58). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), then , Interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main controller 110? Determine (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing is terminated. ..

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the winning game state (high hit, small hit) in the secondary state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4214), and this processing is terminated. A detailed description of this variable stop processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the variation effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is executed as the period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the above, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to stop the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in accordance with the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation status of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect status displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the variable stop-related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4215), and the temporary stop-related command has been received. If it is determined (S4215: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. The process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute is performed.

In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received (S4217), and it is determined that the hit related command has been received. (S4217: Yes) executes the hit-related process (S4218), and ends this process. The details of the hit-related process (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 30). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the latent probability state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a variation effect corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in a state where it is determined that the command has been performed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 side executes the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination and the fluctuation pattern setting, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 On the side, the process of determining the current gaming state is executed first, and then the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described.

Special figure 1 When the fluctuation start processing is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4304: No), the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable state, which is a special feature. FIG. 1 A display command indicating a main fluctuation pattern is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the game state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (of the first special symbol). (Because the variation display is a slave game state), a display command indicating the slave variation pattern in Special Figure 1 is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) is set, first. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S). S4353).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4354). If it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4354: No), the variable display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state. FIG. 2 A display command indicating a slave variation pattern is set (S4355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (variation display of the first special symbol). (Because is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 2 is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination processing (S4151 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number processing (S4208). In this reserved ball number processing (S4208), a process for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed when the gaming state is the latent state.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S4501). The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is latent (S4503). If it is determined that the game is not in latent state (normal state or probable change state) (S4503: No), other processes related to the reserved ball are executed (S4509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state is latent (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504). This right-handed flag 223j is set to ON in the jackpot-related processing (S5002) in the hit-related processing (S4218), and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is set during the ending of the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. This is a flag for setting a dash mode that prompts the player to play a right-handed game when it is determined that there is. If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the right-handed flag 223j is not on (S4504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), the dash end flag 223q is set to ON (S4506) because it is the timing of the end of the dash mode, and the right-handed flag 223j. Is set to off (S4507), other processes related to the reserved ball are executed (S4508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of first special symbol reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processing is executed (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the latent state is reached, the player is notified that there is a reserved ball in the first special symbol by using the dash mode, but depending on the state of the first special symbol, the player is notified. Special Figure 2 The execution of the game may be emphasized and displayed. Specifically, the display mode of the right-handed display may be changed according to the game state or the lottery result, such as when the first special symbol is non-variable, out-of-change fluctuation, or jackpot fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the special figure 2 game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4212). This state command process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the first according to the set gaming state. 3 The process for setting different display modes displayed on the symbol display device 81 is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described.

When the state command process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discriminating means for discriminating the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discriminant result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is If it is determined whether the game is in the latent state (S4605), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in the latent state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. The main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and the display command indicating the super mode is set (S4607). The process proceeds to the processing of S4610.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the latent state), that is, when the state command indicating the probable change state is received. (S4605: No) sets the main display area setting command corresponding to the probability change state (S4608), sets the display command indicating the challenge mode (S4609), and proceeds to the process of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a fluctuation stop process (S4214), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4214). This variable stop processing (S4214) sets a display mode when a variable stop related command (a command set when the stop is displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main control device 110. The process for doing this is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S215 in FIG. 42) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 42).

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the super mode is being executed). Then (S4702), if it is determined that the state is latent (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for stopping the follow-up fluctuation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the state is not latent (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. Further, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4705.

Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 2 variable stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main controller 110. (See S806 in FIG. 34).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the super mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is latent (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the state is not latent (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to the process of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a determination-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the determination-related process (S4216). In this confirmation-related process (S4216), when the confirmation command of the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the dash mode, and the process of ending the dash mode is executed.

In the confirmation-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command from the main control device 110, it determines whether or not it is the end timing of the dash mode. When it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of the dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set to off (S4753), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the dash end flag 223q is not on (S4751: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4218). In this temporary stop-related process (S4218), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure variation time when the temporary stop command is received and an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the 1 variation restart command is received. The process of setting (additional effect) is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4218) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop command is executed. The stop flag 223m is set to ON (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time calculated by the process of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804), and if it is determined to be less than 5 seconds (S4804: Yes), the residual variation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. The remaining period A indicating that is short is set (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4804, when it is determined that the residual variation time is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or more) (S4804: No), then the residual variation period is 5 seconds or more and more than 60 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4806), and if it is 5 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), the period B indicating that the remaining time is the normal remaining fluctuation time is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p. It is set (S4807), and the process proceeds to S4809.

On the other hand, in the process of S4806, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808). , S4809. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is different according to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed. However, the selection ratio of each period information is not limited to this, for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. May be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. You may.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining fluctuation time, and the remaining fluctuation. It can provide the fun of predicting time.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the process of changing the target of the above-mentioned processes of S4802 to S4808 from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is executed (S4810 to). S4816), the process proceeds to S4817. After executing any of the processes of S4813, S4815, and S4816, or when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4809 (S4809: No), the restart process (S4817) is performed. Execute and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the restart process (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4817). This restart process (S4817) executes a process of setting an effect to be executed when the special figure 1 restart command is received.

When the restart process (S4817) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is off (S4901: No). , End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S4902), and the special figure 1 If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), then the temporary stop flag in Special Figure 1 is set to off (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read out. (S4904), a variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process proceeds to S4908. On the other hand, even when it is determined in the process of S4902 that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4908.

In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4908, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 restart command has been received (S4909), and the special figure 2 When it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4909: Yes), then the temporary stop flag of Special Figure 2 is set to off (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read out. (S4911), a variation pattern is determined from the restart variation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a display restart variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display for the player. Further, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4220). In this hit-related process (S4220), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. The process of setting the prize ball number command for display based on the result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot-related process (S5002), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S5001 in FIG. 69) is the jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of S5105 (S5105: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5106.

In the process of S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is smaller than 1 (that is, at 0). If it is determined (S5106: No), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right-handed flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), and the dash is included. Set the ending command (S5109), and then end this process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a small hit-related command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S5003: Yes), the small hit related process (S5004) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a small hit-related process (S5004), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S5004). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is the small hit start command (S5201). If it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S5202), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5203: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5204), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), then it is determined whether or not the prize ball command is received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5005: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5005: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S5006). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S5007), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period until the normal state or the probable change state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) (advantageous continuation period). It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received in the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) or in the latent state.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the time when the latent state is set until the normal state (probable change state) is set again. It can be notified.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning game state (medium big hit, medium small hit) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to provide means. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit, small hit) which is advantageous to the player. , Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is configured to continue, and the small hit game is performed during the latent probability state. It is configured to be easy to break (easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery). Therefore, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again during the advantageous continuation period, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. Will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is based on the jackpot winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10 and the small hit winning probability. It is preferable to configure it so as to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are awarded. And because the actual small hit winning probability is higher than the preset small hit winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are won. The case where it is possible and the case where it can be analyzed can be analyzed so that the player can distinguish it. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and facilitate the continuous game.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of hamari) executed up to that time has exceeded the predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed, or it may be executed during the small hit winning. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of times of lottery of special figure 2) exceeds a predetermined number of times (10 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5305 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Based on the variation pattern related to the effect, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set (S5303), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5304), and the first 2 The process shifts to the process of S5305 for setting the variable display regarding the special symbol (special figure 2).

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 58) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113. To. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 of FIG. 72 will be described. The processing of S5305 to S5308 differs from the processing of S5301 to S5304 of FIG. 72 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

When the processing of S5305 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5305), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5305: No), the processing of S5309 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that it is set to on (S5305: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5306), and the second is based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5308), and the process proceeds to 5309.

In the process of S5309, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5309), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to on (S5309). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to on (S5309: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5310), and the extracted stop type is set. Is set as it is (S5311), a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for display is set (S5312), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit winning or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, latent state) is set, the second special symbol is set. The lottery is configured to be easy to be executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

Further, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is also set. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. It is configured to be done.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. The second special symbol is set so that it is difficult to win a big hit in the state where the normal state is set.

In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device, which is special after the jackpot game is completed. It may be configured so that a high probability state of a symbol is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, latent state, and probabilistic state) can be set as gaming states, but four game states (normal state, latent state) that can be set can be set. , Probability change state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) may be set, or two or less may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a small hit, is a specific gaming state. It is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), but other configurations may be used. For example, the first ball entry port 64 is provided in the left side region, and the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side region. It is the most advantageous game for the player to provide the attached first entrance and the second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is not attached and to perform the right-handed game when the probability change state is set. It may be configured in.

In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to set, and the latent state is in the latent state. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variable stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forced disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 65), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands other than display commands, audio output commands, and accessory drive commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device with the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 82. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the starting prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<About the modified example of the first embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery is performed. By forcibly stopping the first special symbol that is changing in the display mode indicated by the deviation, or by configuring the subtraction of the fluctuation time to be temporarily interrupted (until the small hit game is completed), the second special symbol Although it is configured so that the lottery can be easily executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used.

The jackpot probability of the special symbol is always constant regardless of the game state, and the first entrance, which triggers the fluctuation of the first special symbol, is placed at a position where the left-handed game ball can enter, and the right-handed ball is hit. The right first entry slot corresponding to the first special symbol and the right second entry slot corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in the area where the game ball can be entered, and the right second entry slot is arranged. An electric motor that makes it easier to enter the mouth than in the closed state by opening the game ball to the right second entrance when the game ball passes through the through gate through which the right-handed game ball can pass. Arrange and configure the accessory.

In the normal game state (low probability, non-electric support (probability of normal symbol is low probability)), the game ball is inserted into the first entrance where the game is played by left-handed, and the first special symbol Let the lottery be played. The lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the probability of the normal symbol becomes high after the big hit game, and when the electric accessory is in a short-time game state (game state with electric support) where the electric accessory is likely to be open, the game is played by hitting right. By performing, it becomes possible to play a game by inserting a game ball into the right first entrance and the right second entrance, and the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed at the same time. It will be possible to be done. In the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and a small hit game is executed in which the V winning device formed in the variable winning device in the V winning area is opened. It is configured to be easy to do. Further, when the small hit B (small hit A and small hit B are set) is executed, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly terminated (forcibly set in the judgment result of deviation). Has been done.

Here, in the modified example, the jackpot game executed by the game ball passing through the V winning area by the small hit game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is set with a big hit. Here, in the jackpot executed by the game ball passing through the V winning area, the selection ratio of the jackpot in which the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game is set higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. By setting the number of rounds to be larger than the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot executed through the V winning area may be configured to be advantageous.

In this way, even in a so-called one-kind and two-kind mixed gaming machine, one special symbol in which the jackpot fluctuation that is disadvantageous to the player is executed is based on the small hit or jackpot of the other special symbol. By forcibly stopping by coming off, it is possible to easily give a jackpot advantageous to the player.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. In the second embodiment, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from those of the first embodiment. It's different.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the winning big hit type. Specifically, the jackpot A, which is won only by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), is set to the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C are set to the latent state after the jackpot game is finished. Will be done. The jackpot D that is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, as described above, the first embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ), And if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is discarded (forced stop due to loss) or interrupted (temporary stop) according to the small hit type. It is configured to do.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of the winning jackpot type, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Further, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set as the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and the small hit game (small hit RUSH) is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where a probability change state is set, the jackpot fluctuation starts from the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)), and either of them. The latent state is set in the period until the jackpot game of the special symbol of is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol change of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol change time of the special figure 1 is interrupted (temporarily stopped) or stopped during the period when the small hit game is being executed. , It is configured to be discarded (forced stop when it comes off). In addition, in the second embodiment, different fluctuation times are easily set according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Therefore, depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, there is a possibility that the jackpot fluctuation cannot be interrupted or discarded due to the small hit of the second special symbol. As a result, the player wants to set a long period as the period in which the latent state is set, and therefore wants to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation period.

As shown with reference to FIG. 88, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, a screen for notifying the player that the game state is in the probability change state (challenge mode) at the ending of the jackpot is displayed. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88 (a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 89 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 89A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 89A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, the comment "Challenge mode entry !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set.

Further, in the small display area Dm1, "555" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed. Then, in the small display area Dm1a and the small display area Dm2a, "0" indicating that there is no reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, respectively.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probabilistic state is set as the game state (see FIG. 88 (b)), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probabilistic state. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (b) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic change state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic change state is stored. ), The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 90 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state is changed at the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)) at which the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probability change state. It is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 816 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped and displayed. .. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed from the probable state to the latent state because the effect symbol 816 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the second embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as a display mode of. Then, a comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Since it is configured to be displayed, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 90 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (b). FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 90 (b), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set (in RUSH), the small display area Dm1 is changing. 1 "541" indicating a display mode for suggesting that the fluctuation of the special symbol has been discarded (forced stop due to disengagement) is displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates that a small hit has been won. The display mode "246" is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm7, "V × 3" indicating that the small hit has been won three times is displayed as a display mode indicating the cumulative number of small hits, and in the small display area Dm8, this latent state is displayed. The elapsed time "01:50 (1 minute 50 seconds)" since the setting of is displayed.

Then, the treasure box 817 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 818 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In addition, a star mark 819 is displayed around the staging pattern 818. The star mark 819 is a display mode indicating that the jackpot fluctuation, in which the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, is forcibly stopped by the small hit winning this time. With this configuration, the player can get a sense of relief and can concentrate more on the right-handed game.

In the second embodiment, the star mark 819 is displayed to show the change result of the first special symbol, but the effect is not limited to this, and the effect symbol is shown to show the change result of the first special symbol. The 818 may be displayed to be variable. Further, not only the fluctuation result but also the remaining fluctuation period of the discarded first special symbol may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.

Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner during the latent state, the effect content is variably displayed depending on the state of the first special symbol being non-variable, out-of-order fluctuation, jackpot fluctuation, or the like. You may. For example, the color of the "right-handed" guidance display in the small display area Dm3 may be changed or blinked. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the second embodiment, the right second variable winning device 650, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right area, and the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state is used. It is configured so that you can play games. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent state is set. In the state where the certain state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 90 (a). ))reference. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol is also set in the state where the probability variation state is set. Both of the second special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 90 (a)), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and the problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state occurs. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (change). The presence / absence, the remaining fluctuation period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 91, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 88, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 88), the probability change A "super challenge mode" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "challenge mode" for indicating the state.

When the "super challenge mode" is set, a comment indicating that the sub-display area Ds is the "super challenge mode" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 89 (b), and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 816.

Then, in the small display area Dm1, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, before the latent state is set. The "variation display mode" that is changing from the time point is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super challenge mode" shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 variation is completed (see FIG. 88 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered the "RUSH" via the "super challenge mode" will be described. FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super challenge mode”. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 817, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "435" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (RUSH), that is, during the latent state, a game is executed in which the second special symbol lottery in which the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set by performing the right-handed game is frequently performed. ..

Therefore, during the rush game, the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2, and the change of the first special symbol can be interrupted or discarded by the small hit game. However, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a short fluctuation pattern is selected, the jackpot fluctuation is discarded by the small hit. Can not do it. As a result, the player can prevent the player from winning the unfavorable jackpot in the rush game, and can execute the rush game while wondering whether or not he / she can win the most advantageous jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / latency table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability variation / latency table 202ad2 has the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability variation / latency table 202d (see FIG. 14A) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are specified, and the setting contents of the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are specified for each jackpot type.

The difference is that the game states of the jackpot B and the jackpot C of the probability variation / latent probability table 202ad2 of the first embodiment described above are set after the jackpot game is completed. Specifically, the jackpot B and the jackpot C are configured so that the time saving flag 203m is set to off and the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed. In the second embodiment, the time saving flag 203m is set to ON. That is, in the second embodiment, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won when the probability variation state or the latent probability state is set, after the jackpot game ends, after the jackpot game ends regardless of the jackpot type. The probability change state is set.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time reduction / probability variation table 202ae2 has a variation pattern length corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202e2 (see FIG. 17A) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it makes the difference. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit A", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159". Short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds are associated with and defined, and middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "160 to 196", and fluctuations are specified in the range of "197 to 198". Long fluctuations with a time of 600 seconds are specified in association with each other.

In the second embodiment, as described above, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability change state, the latent state is set as the game state and the right-handed game is executed. Then, if the "big hit A" is won during the probability change state, the short fluctuation (0.1 seconds) is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern, and even if the special figure 2 game is executed in a hurry, it is almost certainly the first. You will win a big hit with a special design. Therefore, the jackpot A is the jackpot that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit B", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 4" and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are specified in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "5-41", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds correspond to the range of "42 to 198". It is specified with.

The jackpot B is configured so that middle fluctuation is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern. And, as described above, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (see FIG. 17 (b)), the small hit is won rather than the big hit A. It is a big hit that is easy to discard.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit C", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 1" and the variation time is 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are specified in association with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are associated with the range of "2 to 5", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds correspond to the range of "6 to 198". It is specified with.

As described above, when the jackpot C is won, the long fluctuation of 600 seconds is easily executed as the fluctuation pattern. During a long fluctuation of 600 seconds, a 1-second fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol will win a small hit with a probability of 1/2, so it is possible to reliably discard this jackpot, and it is the easiest jackpot to discard. It is a type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the game of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in the first embodiment described above, when the game state is in the probable change state, when the jackpot change is started in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game shifts to the 100% probable state. The difference is that if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic / latent state, the 100% probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot. Since the flow of other games is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences between. The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment described above in that the latent probability state can be set from the probable change state as the gaming state at the start of the change of the first special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S231) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S231). The first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is executed and then the game state update process (S332) is executed. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above. In the case of, the difference is that the process of setting the gaming state to the latent state is executed, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after the lottery result of this time is acquired by the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is ON (S451). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is on (S451: Yes), the off-design symbol is set in the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S451 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203n is not on (S451: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the above-mentioned processes S406 to S408 are executed, then the time saving flag 203 m is set to off (S452), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the game state update process (S332), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol change start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process (S332). This game state update process (S332) executes a process of updating the game state at the start of the change of the first special symbol and setting a command to be sent to the voice lamp control device.

In the game state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on (S651). If it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S651: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (S6511: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S652). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S232) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S232). The first special symbol change stop process 2 (S232) does not execute the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) for the first special symbol change stop process (S209 in FIG. 34), and the special figure 2 is a big hit. The difference is that the process of discarding (S809 to S811) is not executed. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551). The jackpot end process 2 (S2551) wins one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C when the gaming state is a latent state with respect to the jackpot end process (S2512) of the first embodiment described above. Then, the process of setting the probability change state is executed, which is different. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot end process 2 (S2551), after executing the above-mentioned processes S2701 to S2704, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (S2751). When it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is D (S2752). When the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the time saving flag 203m is set to off (S2753) and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on in order to set the latent state in the game state (S2753). S2754), a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not D (S2752: No), the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are set to ON in order to set the probability change state in the game state (S2706), and described above. The process of S2709 is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the same as the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a fluctuation stop process (S4214 of FIG. 65) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the fluctuation stop process 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead of (see). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251), for the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the latent state, it is for display corresponding to the current lottery result. The difference is that a process for setting a command (S4751) is added. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been forcibly stopped in an easy-to-understand manner. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, the gaming state is a probabilistic state, and if a jackpot is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the probabilistic change state, the time is shortened at the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the jackpot fluctuation). By setting the flag 203m to off, the latent probability state is set, and the small hit RUSH that executes the small hit game until the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed is set.

In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won and the latent probability state is set, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. Then, by winning the small hit of the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol or forcibly stop it by the deviation, until the big hit of the second special symbol is won. Or, it is configured so that the latent state is set until the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be discarded and the fluctuation is stopped.

In addition to such a configuration, a probability variation end condition and a latent probability end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2, the number of small hit executions, etc.) are set, and when the conditions are satisfied, It may be configured to end the latent state and shift to the normal state. In addition, the end condition (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the latent end condition) is notified to the player, the player determines the game situation, and the special figure 2 game to the special figure 1 game (left-handed). It may be configured to switch to the game). With such a configuration, various playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 112. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, the small hit is configured to be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol, and when a specific small hit (small hit A) is won (the special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating the small hit). (When stopped and displayed), the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped in a display mode that indicates a deviation, and when another small hit (small hit B) is won, the change of the first special symbol that is changing It was configured to interrupt the time subtraction.

Then, when the latent state is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the small hit winnings are frequently generated during the latent state, so that the player can win the prize. It was configured so that a prize ball could be given. Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot game is configured so as to easily shift to the latent state after the big hit game is executed, and the number of times the latent state is set (big hit). An upper limit was set for the number of winnings), and when the upper limit was reached, the normal state was set regardless of the type of jackpot won.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the small hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and when one of the special symbols wins the small hit (special). (When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit), the change of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation. It is configured in.

With this configuration, it is possible to forcibly remove the other special symbol change by drawing any special symbol. Further, since the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the small hit winning of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the jackpot game can be prevented from being executed.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a specific gaming state (for example, a latent state) is set, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed. However, when a specific gaming state is set, the control of forcibly stopping one big hit fluctuation by the other small hit winning is configured to be executed mutually. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific gaming state from ending due to the jackpot winning, and to continue the latent state for a long period of time.

In addition, in the third embodiment, there are a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables referred to when setting fluctuation patterns of each special symbol, and the fluctuation patterns specified in each fluctuation pattern table are different. .. Specifically, the length of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when the big hit is won and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when the small hit is won are different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the probability that the big hit game is actually executed even if the probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the small hit are the same. can. For example, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily set is referred to as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, a jackpot fluctuation of 10 minutes is referred to as one of the special symbol fluctuations. When executed, it becomes possible to execute a large number of other special symbol lottery during the special symbol change. Then, by winning a small hit in the other special symbol lottery, the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that the jackpot game of the special symbol becomes difficult to be performed. Similarly, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is easily set is referred to as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, it is executed during the special symbol fluctuation. Since the number of lottery for the other special symbol is reduced, the jackpot game of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small hit variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) as in the variation pattern set as the above-mentioned jackpot variation. By setting a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation, it is possible to facilitate the big hit game.

Further, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is set as the game state, the game state is advantageous to the player in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Once the latent state is set, the latent state is configured so that the latent state does not end unless the jackpot game of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, by winning a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol and suppressing the execution of the big hit game, it is possible to play the game in the latent state for a long period of time.

In this way, by forcibly stopping (disengaging) the big hit fluctuation of one special symbol by the small hit winning of the other special symbol, it is possible to use the playability to continue the latent state advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game (a game in which a lottery of a special symbol that is not during the jackpot fluctuation) is performed even during the jackpot fluctuation, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a display mode for indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the small hit forcibly stops the player from coming off. The actual lottery result of the symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation can be suggested to the player in a feasible manner.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, the variation pattern command for display to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set. , A variation information storage means for temporarily storing variation information (lottery result of special symbol, variation time, etc.) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is provided, and then the special symbol being changed is forced. Of the commands for forcibly stopping off (variable stop command), when a command for forcibly stopping the special symbol that is changing based on the small hit winning (small hit time fluctuation stop command) is received. , Stop fluctuation information based on the fluctuation information stored in the fluctuation information storage means, together with a display command for forcibly stopping and displaying the changing special symbol on the display control device 114 in a display mode indicating disconnection. Set the display command to suggest.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command for suggesting the stop fluctuation information, for example, the effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big hit, the character of the monster is displayed, and if it is a small hit, the design of the treasure box is displayed. In addition, the color of the monster character is displayed so as to be variable depending on the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how many times the end of the gaming state of the latent probability change can be avoided by making a small hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to suggest the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time even at the timing of displaying the display mode (“V symbol”) indicating the small hit winning. However, the timing of the suggestion display is not limited to this, for example, the timing at which the small hit game is started, the small hit game is in progress, or the small hit game is completed. It may be configured to be performed at the timing. In addition, a fusion display in which a suggestion display and a display for showing a small hit winning may be performed may be executed, or game information for showing a small hit game result (for example, the number of prize balls and the latent state) may be executed. The number of small hit games executed during the game) and the suggestion display may be fused.

Further, the above-mentioned suggestion display may be set so that it is easier to execute when the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has won the jackpot than when the jackpot has not been won. As a result, even if the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has not won the big hit, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit has been won at a good timing.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won, the changing special symbol may be forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped by this small hit. It is good to set the display mode of.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, only the first ball entry port 64b1 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is on the right. The first ball entry port 64b2 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side thereof, a first variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big hit game and a small one on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. A second variable winning device 650, which is opened during a winning game, is arranged.

Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a distribution flow path capable of distributing and guiding the game ball to the right first entry port 64b2 and the second entry port 640 is formed. At the upper part of the distribution flow path, it is launched by right-handed (a game method in which the player launches the game ball with a firing strength capable of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the third symbol display device 81). A rotary distribution member 700 capable of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 is arranged.

The rotary distribution member 700 is formed with a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion that can accept the game ball, respectively, and the rotary distribution member 700 rotates to form a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. It is configured so that the parts alternately face diagonally upward to the left. The rotary distribution member 700 is configured to rotate by about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and the game is hit right with the first receiving portion facing diagonally upward to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101). When the ball enters the first receiving portion, the rotary distribution member 700 rotates 90 degrees to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and distributes (guides) the game ball to the first flow path 701. When the game ball is distributed to the first flow path 7901 by the rotary distribution member 700, the rotary distribution member 700 is stopped with the second receiving portion facing diagonally upward to the left. Next, the game ball hit to the right enters the second receiving portion, and the rotary distribution member 700 rotates to the right due to the weight of the entered game ball, and the second flow path The game ball in the second receiving section is distributed (guided) to 702.

In this way, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the rotary distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the bending path 701a, passes through the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640, and flows out to the lower part of the right side region. Further, the sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back surface side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 101). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side from the viewpoint), and flows out from the outlet 704c to the lower side of the right side region on the game board 13.

Then, the spheres distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 merge in the lower right region, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 It flows down and flows into the out port 66.

Since the rotary distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls launched by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, when 100 balls are launched in one minute, the first flow 50 pieces are distributed to the road 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces are distributed to the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first flow path 701 is composed of a ball passage formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) equivalent to one ball, and the bending path 701a provided in the middle of the first flow path 701 reduces the flow speed of the ball. The ball passing time until the ball flowing into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

In the third embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged in the first flow path 701, and the second ball entry port 640 is arranged in the second flow path 702. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entry port 640.

In the game board 13, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream portion of the first flow path 701, and when the constantly movable member 1500 is movable in the open position (open). (In the case of the state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first entry port 64b.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 (see FIG. 101) of the third embodiment, the balls launched in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the constantly movable member 1500 is arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the provided rolling surface. When this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened is matched. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the constantly movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance slot 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is performed. It is possible to prevent the state in which the special figure 1 is not held from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period in which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball is entered in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 fired balls enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots can enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entrance 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be put into the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed ball is hit more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game in a time-saving state or a big hit state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 will be described focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment. do.

A through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream part of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701a, and a second entry port 640 is arranged in the downstream part of the second flow path 702 (the lower end part of the fifth flow path 704b). is doing. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly inserted into the second entry port 640. Can be entered into.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port is used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert the ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

A case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side region in one minute, the ball that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the ball that is fired next to the ball, and is fired next to the second flow path 702. The ball flowing into the ball flows down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost at the same time (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at one time.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths overlap each other when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area occupied by the ball flow paths of the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second entry port 640), and is the first in the lower right region of the game board 13. The sphere is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the sphere that has flowed out from the flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that flowed out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the spheres that flowed out at a higher speed than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the spheres that flowed out from the first flow path 701 and were irregular. It is possible to suppress the situation where a ball flow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the rotary distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used, for example, 2 Instead of alternating (1: 1) with one flow path, the spheres may be distributed at different ratios, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, a distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passing ball. For example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A dividing member may be used.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110. It should be noted that only the differences from the first embodiment will be illustrated and described, and the illustration and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment has a migration destination selection table 202ba added to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the small hit random number table 202b is added to the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. The second hit random number table 202c is changed to the second hit random number 3 table 202bc, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202f is changed to the normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small hit type selection table 202g is changed to the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, the lottery for the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit. Specifically, if the value of the acquired first random number counter is in the range of "112 to 116", it is configured to be a small hit.

Next, the second random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, even when the probability of the normal symbol is low (normal state, latent state), the player is configured to win the prize by almost hitting the normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 230", it is configured to be a normal symbol hit.

Next, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is also configured to win a small hit. Then, if the value of the small hit type counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", "small hit B" is set. Will be done. Since the content of the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. do.

Then, when the small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped depending on the small hit type, as in the case where the small hit is won in the second special symbol. It is configured as follows. Specifically, if "Small hit A" is won, the second special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, and if it is "Small hit B", the change of the second special symbol is out of order. It is configured to be forcibly stopped. In the third embodiment, the same small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) is used regardless of whether the small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2. ) Are selected at the same ratio (50% each), but the selection ratio for each small hit type may be set as appropriate. If the winning is won, the small hit B may be selected at a higher rate than the case where the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in which the probability of winning the small hit is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of discarding the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1. Further, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, only the small hit B may be set, or it is set when the small hit is won or when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to change the ratio of the small hit type selected according to the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the normal figure variation pattern 3 table 202bf will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the fluctuation time is shortened even when the probability of the normal symbol is low. Specifically, it is configured so that the fluctuation time is 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) at the time of low probability of the normal symbol. With this configuration, it becomes more variable and the chances of drawing lots for ordinary symbols increase. Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, it is configured so that it is easy to win a hit of a normal symbol even when the probability of the normal symbol is low. As a result, even in the latent state, the ball can easily enter the right first entry port 64b2.

Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. The migration destination selection table 202ba is a type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern determined after the small hit game when a small hit is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of migrations thereof. It is a lottery table for determining the number of times (the number of times of execution of the determination game (lottery of a special symbol) which selects a variation pattern from the transitioned variation pattern selection table).

FIG. 105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The migration 1 table 202ba1 (see FIG. 107) and the migration 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) are set in the migration destination table 202ba, and the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba is set. 202ba2 is configured to be set.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing in detail the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The game state is divided into a case where the game state is a latent state (a non-electric support game state in a high-probability game state) and a case where the game state is a game state other than the latent game state (others), and the current game state. If is in a gaming state other than the latent probability gaming state, the migration destination table is not set, and the variation pattern is set from the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) currently set. ing.

On the other hand, in the case of the latent game state, the migration destination table and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern from the migration destination table (specified number after migration) based on the acquired values of the migration counter 203ba, respectively. Are set respectively. Specifically, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "0 to 90", the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected), and 10 times is set (selected) as the specified number after migration. .. When the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "91 to 98", the migration 1 table ba1 is set, and the specified number after migration is set to 3 times. When the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "99", the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, and 100 times is set as the specified number after migration.

In this way, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set as the variation pattern selection table 202e used after the small hit game when the small hit is won only in the latent game state. There is. With this configuration, it is not a left-handed game (a game method in which a player launches a game ball with a firing strength at which the game ball flows down the left flow path of the third symbol display device 81), but a right-handed game. Only in the latent game state, which is the game state in which the game is played, the small hit game can be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern using a specific fluctuation pattern selection table for a predetermined number of times.

Here, in the normal game state (game state without low probability electric support) and the probabilistic game state (game state with high probability electric support), 10 minutes is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Also, since the winning rate to the right first ball entrance 64b2 is configured to be lower than that when hitting the left, the player can hit the left and play the game to the left first ball opening 64b1. It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by inserting the ball. Although not shown in the present embodiment, the setting of the determination value of the second random number table 202c has been changed, and the determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability is "0 to 230". Is set, and "0 to 231" is set as a random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability time, and the difference between low probability time and high probability time is reduced. Further, the set value of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f has also been changed, and both the normal map low accuracy and the normal map high accuracy are set to 500 ms. With this configuration, it is electric regardless of whether it is in a gaming state with electric support (high-probability gaming state in the normal figure) or in a non-electric support gaming state (low-probability gaming state in the normal figure). The accessory is set in a state where it is easy to open, and the game ball is configured to be easier to enter into the second entry port 640 than the left first entry opening 64b1.

However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is remarkably long in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, the right-handed game ball can be configured to be disadvantageous to the player. , You can make the game play by left-handed game. Further, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, so that it is configured to be advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting right (see FIG. 17 (b)). ). On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG. 17 (b), and is configured to suppress the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the third embodiment, in the latent game state, the right-handed game is possible (the fluctuation time is set short and possible), and the lottery with the second special symbol is performed, so that it becomes easy to win a small hit. In the small hit game, since the open game of the 2R second variable winning device 650 is performed, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 win the game ball, and the prize ball for the winning is paid out to the player. This allows the player to have more balls. Therefore, the longer the period of the latent game state is set, the more chances of winning a small hit (number of winnings) can be increased.

Here, if the jackpot A in the first special symbol is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic game state (high probability, game state with electric support), so that the game state is left-handed. It is configured to be set so that a gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute a small hit game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent probability gaming state is set.

However, in the third embodiment, in the case of the small hit B, the lottery result is forcibly deviated from the change of the first special symbol during the change, and the special symbol indicating the small hit is forcibly stopped. It is configured to stop. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the lottery result of the jackpot A is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is small in the second special symbol before the variation time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the fluctuation of the lottery result that becomes the hit B, it is possible to forcibly remove the lottery result and stop and display the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A in the first special symbol that is changing, from the latent game state. It is possible to prevent the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, and it is possible to prolong the period of the latent probabilistic gaming state.

Therefore, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time that is the small hit (may be only the small hit B) in the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time that is the big hit (may be only the big hit A) in the first special symbol. By making it easy to select, it is possible to make the game state advantageous to the player.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, when the transition 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) is determined, the fluctuation time at which the hit / fail judgment result becomes a big hit in the first special symbol has a probability of 60 s with a probability of 99%. As for the fluctuation time in which the time is determined and the hit / fail determination result is a small hit in the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a probability of a selection rate of 95%. Further, in the second special symbol, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Therefore, since the fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is started, 120 deviation fluctuations are possible, and the probability of becoming a small hit in the second special symbol is set in 231/459 (see FIG. 103 (a)). Because of this, there is a high probability that the small hit B will be won (the probability that the small hit B will be selected is 1/2 of the small hit winning), the second special symbol will be stopped, and the big hit A will be won. The fluctuation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a deviation. Further, since the specified number of times is set 100 times in the transition 2 table 202ba2 as shown in FIG. 106, the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set until the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. It is fixed and set (the condition is that the latent game state is set (when the latent game state is changed to another game state, the variable pattern selection table corresponding to the game state of the transfer destination (No. 1) 1) is set as in the embodiment). Even if the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table 202ba2 wins a small hit during the set period (within the specified number of times), the migration destination table is not changed and is the same until the specified number of times elapses. The migration destination table is maintained and set.

In this way, by setting the transition 2 table 202ba2, the setting period of the latent game state becomes long, and during that time, the small hit can be won, and the number of small hit wins is increased and given to the player. The number of prize balls can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can make a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the second special symbol is small as in the first embodiment. It may be configured to hit. In addition, only the small hit B is configured to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol at the result of the lottery, but the first special symbol (in the first special symbol) is not limited to this. In the case of a small hit, the second special symbol) may be forcibly stopped by coming off.

Next, the migration 1 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition 1 table 202ba1. The migration 1 table 202ba1 stores migration information by determining the migration 1 table 202ba1 as the migration destination table when a small hit is won by the migration destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106) (end timing of the small hit game). It is a table set in the area 203bc.

In the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. It is configured to determine the fluctuation time of. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. It is configured to be. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. If the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a short fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a high selection probability, and when the second special symbol is a small hit, it is determined. Since the fluctuation time of 1 s or 0.5 s is selected, it is difficult to forcibly stop the first special symbol after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the jackpot A is won in the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the fluctuation, so that the transition destination table (which is disadvantageous to the player) ( It is configured as a fluctuation pattern selection table). Therefore, according to the migration destination selection table 202ba, the number of times (10 times in the present embodiment) specified after the migration of the migration 1 table 202ba1 is large is set to be disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, the probability of being selected is set to 99/100 in the transition destination selection table 202ba, and in the latent game state, the latent game state is set long and the gambling becomes too high. It is configured to suppress defects.

Next, the transition 2 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition 2 table 202ba2. The transition 2 table 202ba2 is set in the transition information storage area 203bc when the transition 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

In the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. It is configured to be determined. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, the long fluctuation time (60s) is determined with high probability as the fluctuation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The fluctuation time selected when is a small hit is configured so that a short fluctuation time (1s) is selected with high probability. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the small hit B is started in the second special symbol after the fluctuation of the big hit in the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not stopped before the first special symbol is stopped. 2 It becomes easier to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol being changed can be forcibly stopped by the determination result of the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the jackpot A, prolong the period in which the latent probability change is maintained and set, increase the number of executions of the small hit game, and increase the number of prize balls for the player.

Further, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is set as short as 0.5 s, so that the fluctuation time (60 s) which is the jackpot of the first special symbol is set. Even after the above is executed, the fluctuation can be made 120 times until the fluctuation stops, and the lottery probability of the small hit is 231/459. Therefore, the first special symbol stops changing multiple times with a high probability. You can win a small hit in the meantime. Of those who won the small hit, the selection ratio of the small hit B is 1/2, so the fluctuation that becomes the small hit B can be easily stopped by the time the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops, and the execution of the big hit A is prevented. It is structured so that it is easy to do.

Next, the special table will be described with reference to FIG. 109. As the special table, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table ba2 is set, and when the specified number of times has elapsed, the variation pattern for selecting the variation pattern in the latent game state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a kind of selection table.

FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table. When the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set and the specified number of times elapses, this special table is stored in the transition information storage area 203bc at the timing when the next fluctuation pattern is selected after the change of the specified number of times is completed. Set.

In the special table, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the fluctuation time of 60 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured in. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is configured. Further, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 50%, and the fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 50%. Has been done. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a 100% selection probability.

As described above, in the special table, the selection probability that the fluctuation time of 60 s (seconds) is determined when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit is set higher than that of the transition 1 table 202ba1, while the second is set. The selection ratio in which the fluctuation time of 1s is determined as the fluctuation time of the small hit in the special symbol is set low. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation in the second special symbol is set to 0.5 s, which is shorter than the transition 1 table 202ba1. That is, in the special table, the fluctuation of 60s, which is the jackpot A in the first special symbol, is stopped as compared to the transition 1 table 202ba2, so that the fluctuation of the small hit B of the second special symbol is stopped, so that it is easier to forcibly stop the fluctuation. It is composed of a table that is advantageous to the player, and is equivalent to setting a state of the game that is advantageous to the player by setting a special table.

On the other hand, in the special table, a long fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 1/2 of the fluctuation time of the small hit, so that the fluctuation (variation time 60s) that becomes the jackpot A in the first special symbol is started. It is configured so that a small hit fluctuation of at most one time can be executed. As a result, the special table is configured so as not to be a table more advantageous than the transition 2 table 202ba2.

In this way, the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set, and when the specified number of times elapses, a special table that is in an advantageous game state is set until the next small hit is made and the migration destination table is determined by lottery. It is configured in. As a result, it is configured to suppress that the jackpot A is executed and the latent game state is terminated between the time when the specified number of times elapses and the time when the table is transferred to the next transfer destination table. Further, since the transition 2 table 202ba2, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is set, and even after the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set. , It is possible to maintain a state in which the player's motivation to play is enhanced, and it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the migration destination table to be set next.

Normally, in a gaming machine, the player is most interested in the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, but according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the player is interested in the jackpot game. In the latent game state, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot game in the first special symbol will not be executed, and different expectations can be given depending on the game state, so that the game is more diverse. Can be.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a migration counter 203ba, a post-migration fluctuation count counter 203bb, and a migration information storage area 203bc are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The migration counter 203ba is a counter for determining the migration destination table and the specified number of times (specified number of times) after the migration from the migration destination selection table 202ba. The transition counter 203ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is a counter value that is updated by the process of S2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. be. When the power is turned on, the value backed up when the power is turned off is updated, the RAM is cleared, and when the backup area is initialized, the update is started from the initial value "0". The transition counter 203ba is configured to be acquired based on the fact that the small hit is won in the processing of S1172 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. ing. Regarding the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3, the processing of the second special symbol in the processing of the special drawing 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) is the first special symbol, and the processing of the first special symbol is the first. Since it only replaces each of the two special symbols, its illustration and explanation are omitted.

The post-migration fluctuation count counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the executed special symbol (total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the migration destination table is set. .. The post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb has an initial value when the migration destination table is set in the processing of S1175 in the special figure 2 out-of-variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A certain "0" is set. Further, in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071), the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba after being added one by one. If it is determined whether or not the table exists and the number of times is specified, the process of setting the special table in the transition information storage area 203bc is performed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 3 (not shown), the processing for the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is executed in the same manner as in the special drawing 2 deviation variation processing 3.

The migration information storage area 203bc is a storage area in which the migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202ba and the special table set when the specified number of times of the set migration destination table have elapsed are set. When the information of the migration destination table is stored in this area, it is controlled so that the variation pattern is determined from the migration destination table of the stored type as the variation pattern selection table of the special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 112. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31: S306) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (not shown) with respect to the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37: S908) is in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), and the special figure 2 deviation variation process (FIG. 38: S1009) is in the special figure 2 deviation variation. The difference is that the process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) has been changed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special. Since it differs only in that it is changed to a design, detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1001). It is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether it is in the probability change game state or the latent probability change game state. When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 is on, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the high probability time (S1003). After that, the process of S1005 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (S1002: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 and S1004 is a big hit (S1005). When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1005: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set as a big hit (S1007).

Based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the fluctuation count counter 203bb after migration is reset to "0" (S1071). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1005: No), the special figure 2 out-of-order variation process is executed (S1009). After executing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), this processing is terminated. The special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 112, but the processing necessary for starting the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is deviation is Will be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the special figure 2 deviation variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), which is one of the processes in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment. The processing will be described. In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S1101). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1103). For the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol is set (S1104). It is determined whether either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set (S1171). When it is determined that the migration destination table or the special table is set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-migration variation counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set in the processing of S1171 (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, the migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set migration destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S1101: No), the value of the post-shift fluctuation number counter 203bb is incremented by 1 (S1176). Then, in the process of S1176, it is determined whether or not the value of the added post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). When the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a migration command is set (S1179), and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. 2 Set the out-of-order symbol of the special symbol (S1105), and end this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S1177 that the value of the post-migration fluctuation counter 203bb is not a specified number (S1177: No), the processing of S1178 to S1179 described above is skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment described above will be described. The high-probability gaming state in the latent probabilistic and probabilistic gaming states shifts to the low-probability state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). It may be configured to do so. With such a configuration, even if the migration destination table for forcibly stopping the execution of the jackpot A is continuously determined, the game state can be changed and the gambling property becomes significantly high. Problems can be suppressed.

Further, as a further modification 2 of the third embodiment, the transition destination table to be selected is set to be variable depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the latent probability change gaming state, and for example, 200 times or more (the first). When 1 special symbol and the total number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol fluctuate, the jackpot fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is lengthened (for example, 300s), and the small hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is shortened (for example). , 0.5s) Set. By shortening the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol to 0.5 s, it may be configured to set a migration destination table that is more advantageous for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation to forcibly stop the jackpot A by the small hit of the second special symbol in the latent probability change, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 129. The fourth embodiment is a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state with respect to the second embodiment described above (special symbol high-probability end). The difference is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is added as the condition (condition, high probability end condition of the normal figure) and a new effect is added based on the above-mentioned end condition.

In the second embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability change state, the latent probability state is set at the start of the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) for indicating the jackpot winning, and the latent probability state is the jackpot. It is configured to continue until the game is started (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the jackpot). Further, when the small hit of the special figure 2 is won and the small hit game is executed during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the small hit. In some cases), the lottery result (big hit) of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and the game is forcibly stopped when the special figure 1 is out of the picture.

With this configuration, since the jackpot game due to the jackpot fluctuation in which the latent probability state is set is not executed, the predetermined latent probability state period (the jackpot fluctuation period in Special Figure 1) can be changed. In some cases, it was possible to provide the player with a latent state for a long period of time, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability change state, the latent state is set at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. As a condition for ending the latent state, a special symbol fluctuation end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is newly added. With this configuration, it is possible to change the period in which the latent state is continuously set by discarding the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1, and the termination condition of the latent state while discarding the jackpot winning. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of danger that the above is established.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as a condition for ending the special symbol fluctuation, a condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol set after the end of the jackpot to the low probability state is set. In other words, if, for example, 50 special map fluctuations are set as the special map variation end condition, if the special map 1 jackpot is won in the 10th special map variation in the probable change state, the remaining 40 special map variations can be won at the maximum. The fluctuation can be executed as a game in the latent state. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the 40th special figure change in the probable change state, only 10 special figure changes can be executed as a game in the latent state. As a result, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the latent state as soon as possible, so that the player can pay attention to the game in the probability change state. can.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect mode of the notification effect for showing that the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state is variably set based on the remaining period of the latent state period. It is configured in. That is, in the present embodiment, the latent state is terminated without winning the jackpot (the condition for ending the special figure fluctuation is satisfied). Therefore, for example, the remaining period of the latent state is short. If the special figure 1 big hit is discarded based on the special figure 2 small hit winning, there is a high possibility that the latent state will end with the big hit being discarded. It may be a disadvantageous game for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the latent state is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) as an effect mode of the notification effect for showing that the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state. Is 30 times or more), an advantageous staging mode is set to suggest that the discarding of the special figure 1 jackpot can be an advantageous game for the player, and the remaining period of the latent state is less than the predetermined period. In this case, it is configured to set a disadvantageous staging mode that suggests that the discarding of the special figure 1 jackpot this time may be a disadvantageous game for the player. As a result, it is possible to suggest the future development of the game to the player, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, depending on the type of the special figure 2 small hit, the small hit type that discards the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the small hit type that does not discard (interrupts). ) It has a small hit type, and is configured to execute the above-mentioned notification effect regardless of the type of the winning small hit. This makes it difficult for the player to know when the special figure 1 fluctuation was discarded.

Next, the flow of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing a flow that is advantageous to the player among the flows of the game in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends and the latent probability state is set. FIG. 114 is a timing chart showing the probability change state after the jackpot ends. This is a timing chart showing a flow that is advantageous to the player among the flows of the game in which the latent state is set after is set. The second implementation described above describes the flow in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the flow when the probability change state shifts to the latent state, and the display mode of the effect display executed at that timing. Since it is the same as the form, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113, among the flow of the game in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends and the latent probability state is set, a flow that is advantageous to the player will be described. As shown in FIG. 113, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the state where the probability change state (50 times) is set after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure change is stopped and displayed at the timing. The number of residual probability changes is subtracted and displayed.

Then, as in the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the third special figure 1 lottery after the probability change state is set, the special figure 1 variation corresponding to the jackpot winning (special figure 1 jackpot variation). At the timing when is started, the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the latent probable state. At this point, if the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the super challenge mode is displayed during the period until the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 113 (b)) (FIG. 91 (a)). reference). Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state becomes feasible, the RUSH mode in which the small hit game is frequently executed is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

In the state where the game state shifts to the latent state due to the execution of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery is repeatedly executed by the right-handed game, and the special figure 2 is among them. When the small hit (small hit B) is won, the small hit notification effect based on the number of residual probability changes at the time when the small hit B is won is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 113, since the small hit B is won when the number of residual probability changes is "44", it is easy to aim for the big hit winning in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period. A “chance display” (FIG. 113 (d)) indicating that the small hit B has been won at a timing favorable to the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a)). Then, after the small hit game is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are newly started, and the RUSH mode indicating that the latent state is in the latent state is displayed (FIG. 113 (e). )). After that, when the number of remaining probability changes is "30", a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big hit game is executed.

As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 113, immediately after the probability change state is set (in the third special figure 1 lottery after the probability change state is set), the special figure 1 jackpot is won and the latent state is changed. Since it is set and the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) is won at an early stage in the latent state (in the second special figure 2 lottery after the latent state is set), special figure 1 It is possible to execute a latent state game for a long period of time without being involved in the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation. Further, since the special figure 2 jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the discarded special figure 1 jackpot, is won during the latent state, the game flow is most advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, many special figure fluctuations are executed from the time when the probability change state is set until the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and the time when the latent state is set. The number of residual probability changes is "7". Then, since the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) was won during the latent state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded. In other words, since the timing at which the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded is the number of residual probability changes of "5", it is difficult to aim for the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period. A "pinch display" ((c) in FIG. 114) indicating that the small hit B has been won at a timing unfavorable to the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (b)).

Further, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, in the seven latent state games executed after the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded, the jackpot was not won in the special figure 2 lottery, so that the jackpot was won. Without winning, the latent state ends and the normal state is entered. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to discard the special figure 1 jackpot as shown in FIG. 113 depending on the timing of discarding the special figure 1 jackpot variation executed during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 114, it is possible to set a case where it is easy to become a player and a case where it is more likely to be disadvantageous to the player if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always feel tense and play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, when a predetermined transition condition (special figure 1 big hit) is satisfied, the probabilistic state is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the maximum period in which the latent state is set varies according to the length of the period until the transition condition is satisfied. That is, as shown in FIG. 114, even if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded immediately after the latent probability state is set, the remaining remaining latent probability period may be short. Therefore, after the probability change state is set, the transition condition to the latent state is established as soon as possible, and after the latent state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is quickly discarded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect mode at the time of winning a small hit is changed based on the length of the remaining latent probability period in the latent probability state (the remaining number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent probability state). However, it is not limited to this, for example, it is determined by discriminating between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation during execution and the remaining number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state. Fig. 1 When it is determined that the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state is larger if the jackpot fluctuation is discarded, a "chance display" indicating that the small hit B is won at a timing advantageous to the player is displayed. "Pinch" indicating that the player has won the small hit B at a timing that is disadvantageous to the player when it is determined that the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed during the latent state is smaller if the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded. It may be configured to display "display".

<Regarding the content of the production in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, an example of a characteristic display mode of the effect among the effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 (a) shows the display content displayed when the residual latency period is a predetermined number of times (30 times) or more, and the small hit B is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, in which the residual latency period is less than a predetermined number of times (30 times), and during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation causes the small hit B. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when it is elected. Of the various display modes (display areas) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be given. Omit.

As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, the height of the special symbol becomes high when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is configured so that the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the number of remaining special figure fluctuations (remaining latency period) until the probability state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol with the latency state set. A small display area Dm21 is formed as a display area for showing a display mode (“44 times” in the figure) for showing. That is, FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the latent state ends when the special figure fluctuation is executed 44 times.

Further, FIG. 115A is displayed when the latent state during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation and the timing when the small hit B is won by the special figure 2 lottery, that is, when the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded. Since the display screen is shown, the small display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode (“541”) indicating that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is forcibly removed, and the small display area Dm2 is displayed. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“246”) in which the variation in Special Figure 2 indicates a small hit. Then, in the main display area Dm, the treasure box 817 is opened as a small hit notification effect for notifying the player that the small hit B has been won, and the effect symbol 818 is displayed in a display mode indicating "V" from the inside. To. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lucky display mode 851 for suggesting that the timing of winning the small hit B during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is an advantageous timing for the player is displayed from the treasure box 817. It is configured in.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 jackpot (there are many prize balls during the jackpot, and it is easy to set a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed). Is configured so as to be easy to be given, and it is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed for other gaming states during the latent probability state.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state and the latent probability state is set, the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and after discarding the running special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded. Fig. 2 Winning a big hit in the lottery is the most advantageous game. However, in the present embodiment, even if the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed, when the special symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the special symbol becomes a low probability state. Since it is configured to shift, if the timing to discard the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is late in the state where the latent probability state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded and the special figure 2 jackpot is set. There was a risk that the high-probability state of the special symbol would end without winning.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining latent probability period at the timing when the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded during the latent probability state is determined, and based on the determination result, the current jackpot discard is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that it can be suggested (notified) whether or not it is a result. Specifically, if the remaining latent probability period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is a predetermined number of times (30 special figure fluctuations) or more, the remaining latent probability state. Since it is possible to easily win the big hit by the special figure 2 lottery, the lucky display mode 851 indicating that the small hit B is won at a good timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a)). ).

On the other hand, if the remaining latency period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is less than the predetermined number of times (30 special figure fluctuations), the special figure 1 is in the remaining latent state. Since it is difficult to win a big hit in FIG. 2 lottery, a pinch display mode 851 indicating that the small hit B is won at a bad timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable according to the residual latency period at the time when the special figure 2 small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to give a further meaning to the small hit game that is frequently performed during the latent state, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that the player does not get bored at an early stage.

<About the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed while the high-probability state of the special symbol is set as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state with respect to the second embodiment described above. It differs in that the condition related to the number of special map fluctuations is added, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the fourth embodiment, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, the special figure change is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Then, it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to set an upper limit for the period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of a special symbol) is set, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the latent probability state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the special figure in the state where the normal state is set. As one jackpot, a jackpot (big hit A) in which a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol) after the jackpot game ends. Since it has a jackpot (big hit B, jackpot C) in which a normal symbol (low probability state) is set, the jackpot game is more than the case of shifting to the latent state via the probability change state after the jackpot game ends. If the latent state is set after the end, it is possible to play the game in the latent state for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game transition between the probabilistic state and the latent probability state, the special symbol is based on the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the high probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state, but not limited to this, the high probability state of the special symbol can be changed on condition that the gaming state has changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. It may be configured to reset the condition for terminating (shifting to the low probability state).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122. In the fourth embodiment, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the second embodiment described above, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It is different from the point that the configuration of is partially changed. The same elements as those in the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117, in the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type selection 2 table (not shown) is changed to the jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd with respect to the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the variation pattern selection 2 table (not shown) is changed to the variation pattern selection 4 table 202ce. Since the other elements are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd defines the contents of the jackpot type set when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the fourth embodiment, and the jackpot type selection 2 table of the second embodiment described above is defined. On the other hand, the provisions for setting the game state after the jackpot game is completed have been changed.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119, the contents of various tables included in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd will be specifically described. In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type is selected by referring to different tables according to the gaming state. Specifically, the normal use 4 referred to when the jackpot is won in the normal state. It has a table 202cd1 and a probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2 that is referred to when a big hit is won in the probability variation state and the latency state.

FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 118, the content specified in the normal 4 table 202cd1 is a time saving counter instead of the time saving flag 203m for the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 13) also used in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the content regarding the probability variation counter 203cg is specified instead of the probability variation flag 203g at 203 cm, and the other points are the same.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", it is stipulated that "50" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, "50" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and other jackpots. In the case of (“big hit B” to “big hit D”), it is stipulated that “0” is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and “50” is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. That is, when "big hit A" is selected, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the special symbol change (special symbol change) is executed 50 times. When "Big hit B" to "Big hit D" are selected, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is the special figure after the end of the big hit game. It is set to continue until the fluctuation is executed 50 times.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is updated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is stopped. Is configured to be updated (subtracted). That is, when the 50th special figure change is executed after the probability change state is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is "0" and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is "1" during the special figure change period. That is, the latent state is set.

With this configuration, the period for which the latent probability state is set can be changed according to the length of the fluctuation time set for the 50th special figure change. It is possible to be interested not only in the variation lottery result (win / fail determination result) but also in the variation pattern selection result (variation time selection result). Further, in this case, when selecting a fluctuation pattern (off variation pattern) in the case where the lottery result of the 50th special figure variation is out of order, there is a slight probability (for example, 0.1%) for a long time (10). Minutes) deviation fluctuations (ultra-long deviation fluctuations) are configured to be selected, and during the period of the latent state set when this ultra-long fluctuation is selected, rather than winning a big hit in the special drawing lottery. It may be configured so that many benefits are given to the player.

In addition, various counter values and update conditions may be set so that the latent probability state is not set during the final fluctuation in which the probability change state is set (in this embodiment, the 50th special figure change). For example, 51. Immediately before the start of the first special figure change (the period from the establishment of the start condition of the 51st special figure change to the selection of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special figure change), the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set. It may be configured to be "0". As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the period when the 50th special symbol change is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for updating (subtracting) the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set as the stop timing of the special figure change, but the timing is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the stop timing of the 50th special figure change. , Immediately before the start of the 51st special figure change (the period from the establishment of the start condition of the 51st special figure change to the jackpot judgment corresponding to the special figure change or the selection of the fluctuation pattern). It may be configured to update (subtract) the value of the probability variation counter 203cg. With this configuration, even if the special figure change of the 51st transition is executed while the 50th special figure change is being executed, the special symbol will be displayed for the special figure change of the 51st transition. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege because the jackpot determination based on the high probability state is not executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the contents specified in the probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2 will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation / latency 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 119, specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" to "big hit C", "50" is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm, and "50" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. In the case of "big hit D", "0" is set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm, and "50" is specified in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. That is, when "big hit A" to "big hit C", that is, special figure 1 big hit is selected, the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) after the end of the big hit game is the special symbol. It is set to continue until the fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) is executed 50 times, and when "big hit D", that is, the special figure 2 big hit is selected, the probability state (high of the special symbol) after the big hit game is completed. The probability state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set to continue until the special figure fluctuation is executed 50 times.

With this configuration, in the high probability state of the special symbol (in the probabilistic state, in the latent probability state), the latent probability state is more likely to be set in the special figure 2 jackpot than in the special figure 1 jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to abandon the special figure 1 jackpot and have the player enthusiastically perform a game aiming at the special figure 2 jackpot. Further, since the jackpot discarded by the special figure 2 small hit is not the most advantageous jackpot for the player, it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120, in the present embodiment, the probability variation counter 203cg is replaced with the probability variation flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203cm is replaced with the time reduction flag 203m with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 19) of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that it is provided, and is the same otherwise. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203cg is a counter for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the period in which the value larger than 0 (1 or more) is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is special. It is configured to be in a high probability state of the symbol. The value of the probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (subtracted by 1) at the timing when the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is stopped. Further, when the stop display (confirmed display) is performed in the display mode indicating that the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is set to "0".

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg (for example, 50 times) is set based on the winning jackpot type at the end timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0, the jackpot determination and the selection of the fluctuation pattern according to the high probability state of the special symbol are executed, and when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the value is subtracted by 1. Will be done. That is, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and when "50" is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, the special symbol is used. The period from the setting of the high probability state to the stop of the 50th special symbol change is set as the high probability state of the special symbol.

The time saving counter 203 cm is a counter for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the period in which the value larger than 0 (1 or more) is set as the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is usually set. It is configured to be in a low probability state of the symbol. The value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted by 1) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started. Further, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is set to "0" at the timing when the big hit fluctuation is executed.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm (for example, 50 times) is set based on the winning jackpot type at the end timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, the hit determination (hit determination of the second symbol) or the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the high probability state of the normal symbol or the like. , The selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed, and when the special symbol variation is executed, the value is subtracted by 1. That is, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and when "50" is set for the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, the height of the normal symbol is set. The period from the setting of the probability state to the start of the 50th special figure change is set as the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg set at the end timing of the jackpot game and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm are set to the same value (50), but the value is not limited to this, and different values are used. It may be configured to be configurable. With this configuration, it is possible to set various game states based on the number of times the special figure change is executed, and it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Specifically, a jackpot type is provided as a part of the jackpot type in which a value smaller than the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg (for example, "100)) is set with the value of the time saving counter 203 cm (for example," 1 "). Therefore, it is preferable to configure the jackpot type in which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game so that the ease of transition from the probability change state to the latent state is different. With this configuration, even if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game can be played while expecting that the latent state is set as soon as possible, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the voice lamp control in the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the apparatus 113.

First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The ROM 222 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above in that a small hit display selection table 222ca is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit display selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting an effect mode (effect mode during the small hit game) for indicating that the small hit has been won during the latent probability state, and is a probability change at the time of the small hit winning. It is configured so that different production modes are selected based on the value of the counter 203 cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm.

Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents specified in the small hit display selection table 222ca in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit display selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 122, the small hit display selection table 222ca defines a different display mode corresponding to the type of the winning small hit, the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223a, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223cc. Has been done.

Specifically, when the small hit type is "small hit A" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "50 to 1", the value of the staging counter 223cc is "chance" in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, when the small hit type is "small hit B" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "50 to 31", "chance" is displayed in the range of the effect counter 223cc value of "0 to 69". When the display mode of "chance" is defined in the range of "70 to 99" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "30 to 1", the value of the staging counter 223cc is "0 to 99". The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the range of.

Here, in the present embodiment, the processing for the change in the special figure 1 being executed differs depending on the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. Specifically, the small hit type. When "small hit A" is selected as, the game is temporarily interrupted without subtracting the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution until the small hit game ends, and after the small hit game ends. When the control (interruption control) for restarting the subtraction of the interrupted fluctuation time is executed and "small hit B" is selected, the timing at which the small hit game is executed (a special symbol in the display mode indicating the small hit) is executed. At the timing when the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed), the control (discard control) for forcibly stopping the change in the special figure 1 being executed in the display mode indicating the deviation is executed.

In this way, by having a small hit that can discard the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation that is being executed and a small hit that cannot be discarded, it is possible to determine whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation that is being executed is discarded. It is possible to prevent the player from being easily discriminated only by whether or not the winning game is executed. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the small hit notification effect is configured to be different based on the selected small hit type. Thereby, by confirming the display mode of the small hit notification effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded.

In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low-probability state, and further, the small hit B is won and is being executed. When the special figure 1 change of No. 1 is discarded, a new special figure 1 change is executed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, if the small hit game based on the small hit (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation is frequently executed during the latent probability state, the number of special figure fluctuations is increased due to the special figure fluctuation in which the lottery result is discarded. It will be updated frequently, and it will not be possible to fully entertain the player in the latent state.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the first latent period in which the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is executed in the period in which the latent probability state is set, it is a game to win the small hit B in the special figure 2 lottery. In the second latent period after the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is abandoned, it is advantageous for the player to win the small hit A in the special figure 2 lottery. In this way, by configuring so that the small hit type that is advantageous to the player is switched within the period in which the same game state (latent state) is set, the timing of winning the small hit and the winning It is possible to make the player interested in both the content of the small hit type and the content of the small hit type, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the special figure 1 big hit is discarded by the small hit B won during the latent state. FIG. 1 In a state where the big hit has already been discarded, even if the small hit B is won, the display mode of the small hit display is selected by the same processing as when the small hit A is won. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the small hit that was won after the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation was discarded is "small hit A" or "small hit B".

In the present embodiment, even if the lottery result is abandoned, the special figure change is configured to subtract the number of special figure changes as one special figure change, but the lottery is not limited to this, for example. It may be configured so that the special figure variation in which the result is discarded is not added to the special figure variation number. Specifically, the special figure change number may be updated (subtracted) at the start timing of the special figure change, and the special figure change number may be updated (added) when the lottery result is discarded. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the same number of special symbol lottery results as the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. In the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned second embodiment is provided with a setting of a probability variation counter 203 cg value, a time saving counter 203 cm value, an update process, and a process executed using each value. The difference is that the processing executed based on the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203m, the update process, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203m is deleted. Specifically, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) is replaced with the game state update process (see S332 in FIG. 97) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S331 in FIG. 96). The state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is replaced with the first special symbol change stop process 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98), and the first special symbol change stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is completed. The difference is that the jackpot end process 4 (see S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed instead of the process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99). In the fourth embodiment, the target of the processing executed for the above-mentioned first special symbol (special figure 1) is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Although it differs from the second embodiment in that the process for the special figure 2 changed to the above-mentioned is also executed, the target of the process for the special figure 1 described above is changed to the special figure 2 and used for each process. The elements to be used are also different only in that the element for the special figure 1 is changed to the element for the special figure 2, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) sets the value of the probability variation counter 203cg for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S331 in FIG. 96) instead of the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g. The difference is that the process of determining (see S471 in FIG. 123) and the process of determining the value of the time saving counter 203 cm instead of the setting status of the time saving flag 203 m (see S472 in FIG. 123) are executed. It is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the game state update process 4 (S271) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S271). This game state update process 4 (S271) is executed at the change start timing of the special symbol, and is a process of updating (subtracting) the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and the probability variation counter 203 cg. The process of determining the value and setting the state command for indicating the current game state is executed.

When the game state update process 4 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S671), and 0. When it is determined that it is larger than (1 or more) (S671: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is subtracted by 1 (S672), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203 cm after the subtraction is set. (S673). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S671 that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (0) (S671: No), the process proceeds to S675 described later.

The remaining time reduction command set in the process of S673 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same process as the other commands. By receiving the command for the number of remaining time reductions, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the number of times the special figure changes until the time reduction state (high probability state of the normal symbol) ends, and the effect mode based on the number of remaining time reductions (for example). , Display the number of remaining hours).

After finishing the processing of S673, next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203 cm after subtraction is 0 (S674), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is not 0 (S674: No). This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S674 that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is 0 (S674: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is larger than 0 (S675), and it is determined that the value is larger than 0. If so (S675: Yes), a state command indicating the latent state is set (S653), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is not larger than 0 (S675: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S671, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of the normal symbol (S671: No). Next, the process proceeds to the process of S675 described above, the process of S653 or S654 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately discriminate the game state that is variable based on the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and the discrimination result is surely sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Can be output to. Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the change start timing of the special symbol, and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is updated (subtracted) at the stop display timing of the special symbol. Therefore, the command for indicating the current game state can be set at both the special figure change start timing and the special figure change stop timing. This makes it possible to determine the current gaming state in more detail.

In this embodiment, since the numerical value set in the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and the numerical value set in the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg are the same, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg are the same. However, by making the value set in the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value set in the probability variation counter 203 cg different, the game state when the values of various counters become 0. It may be configured to make the transition of. Even in such a case, by using the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 124) of the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably set a command indicating the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is the stop display timing of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the process of updating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is added. The other processing contents are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is executed, the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag indicating that the jackpot in special figure 1 is won among the jackpot flags 203n) is first set to on. If it is determined whether or not the flag is set (S801), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not set to ON (S801: No), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0. (S851).

When it is determined in the processing of S851 that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current state is in the high probability state of the special symbol (S851: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set to 1. Subtraction (S852) was performed, a state command indicating the game state according to the current value of the time saving counter 203 cm, the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg, and the state command indicating the gaming state was set (S853), and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg was subtracted by the processing of S852. A subtraction command indicating that is set (S854), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is not larger than 0 (0) (S8511: No), since the current state is normal, the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the update processing of various parameters (probability change counter 203 cg, time reduction counter 203 cm) that are factors for shifting the gaming state is performed at the start timing and the stop timing of the special figure change. Specifically, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is executed at the start timing of the special figure change, and the process of updating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is executed at the stop timing of the special figure change. .. With this configuration, for example, when a probabilistic state (a game state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set to "50" and the value of the probabilistic counter 203 cg is set to "50") is set, the special figure changes. The value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the start timing of, and when the value becomes "0", the gaming state is changed from the probable change state to the latent state until the special figure fluctuation ends. Furthermore, it is possible to shift the latent state to the normal state at the timing when the special figure fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the latent state only for a specific period (special figure fluctuation period).

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change starts (the timing at which the game state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is executed) and the timing at which the special figure change ends (the first special symbol change stop process 4). (See S251 in FIG. 125) is executed (when), and a state command for indicating the current gaming state is set. With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the gaming state can be changed a plurality of times during the period from the start time to the end of one special figure change, the voice lamp control is performed. The current gaming state can be reliably determined on the device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, a value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set (initial setting) based on the set jackpot type, and a command (number of times command) for indicating the set value (for example, 50) is given. It is configured to output to the voice lamp control device 113, and further, it is configured to output a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg has been subtracted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the count command, the value (for example, 50) of the probability variation remaining count counter 223ca is set based on the information included in the count command, and the subtraction command is received. It is configured to subtract 1 from the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca each time. As a result, the main controller 110 only needs to set a command for indicating the initial setting value (number of times command) and a command for indicating that the subtraction has been performed (subtraction command), and the probability change counter after the subtraction. Since it is not necessary to set a command indicating a value of 203 cg, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 may be configured to set a remaining number of times command for directly indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg.

Returning to FIG. 125, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is on (winning the jackpot) (S801: Yes), the processes of S804 to S816 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. Then, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, in the process of S813 with respect to the second embodiment described above, the element to be reset is the value of the probability variation counter 203cg instead of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm instead of the time reduction flag 203m. The only difference is that there are some points, but the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126). The jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is a process for defining a gaming state set after the jackpot game ends with respect to the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. Is different. Specifically, in the second embodiment described above, the process of setting (on / off setting) the probability change flag 203 g and the time saving flag 203 m according to the winning jackpot type is executed, whereas in the present embodiment. The difference is that the process of setting the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and the probability variation number in the process of S2701 is executed. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203h is 2 (S2701: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (S2771), and the value of the probability variation counter 203h is set to 0. (S2703), the process proceeds to S2709, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the processing is executed in the order of S2701 and S2704, then it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the probable change state or the latent state (S2772), and then the probable change state or the latent state. If it is determined to be (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S2752), and if it is determined to be jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg. Is set to "50" and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is set to "0" (S2775), and the process proceeds to S2709.

Further, in the processing of S2752, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot D (big hits A to C) (S2752: No), then the value of the time saving counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg “50” is set for both (S2773), and the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2772 that the gaming state at the time of winning is a probable change state or not a latent state (normal state) (S2772: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is jackpot A. If it is determined (S2706) and it is determined that the jackpot A is (S2706: Yes), the process of S2773 described above is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of S2709.

In the processing of S2705, when it is determined that the hit is not A (S2705: No), "50" is set for the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, "0" is set for the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (S2774), and the processing of S2709. Move to. In the process of S2709, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the probability variation counter 203 cg set in the jackpot end process 4 (S2571) described above is executed. The number of times command for indicating the value of and the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is set (S2776), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a maximum period (value of the probability variation counter 203 cg on the main control device 110 side) in which a high probability state of a special symbol can be set with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above. Processing for displaying (suggesting) the display mode (probability change remaining number display) for notifying (suggesting) the player of the special figure change number required until becomes 0, and the process for displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the latent. Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded by this small hit winning (execution of the small hit game) in the small hit notification effect that is executed when the small hit is won with the probability state set. It is different from the process of setting the display mode for suggesting. The other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4151) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4151). This command determination process 4 (S4151) differs from the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) in that a process when a command for the remaining number of times is received from the main control unit 110 is added, and other than that. The elements of are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 4 (S4151) is executed, the same processes of S4201 to S4214 as the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) are executed, and the fluctuation stop related command is received in the process of S4213. If it is determined that there is no such command (S4213: No), then a count-related command (a count command for indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg has been subtracted) is received. If it is determined that the command has been received (S4251), and if it is determined that the command has been received, the count-related process is executed (S4252), and this process is terminated.

Here, in the number-of-times related process executed in the process of S4252, the presence / absence of a high probability state of the special symbol and the period (remaining period) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. Is determined, and a process of setting a display command for displaying the display mode (number of residual probabilities) based on the determination result is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4252 that the command related to the number of times has not been received (S4251: No), the same process of S4215 to S4221 as the above-mentioned command determination process (see S4151 of FIG. 59) is executed. Execute this process.

Here, the contents of the number-of-times related process (S4252) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number-of-times related process (S4252). When this count-related process (S4252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the number-related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not a subtraction command (S5401: No), subtraction is performed. Various processes executed when a command is received are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5410 described later.

If it is determined that the related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is larger than 0 (S5402), and if it is determined to be large. (S5402: Yes), the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is subtracted by 1 (S5403), a display remaining number command indicating the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca after subtraction is set (S5404), and then after subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405).

In the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405: Yes), the high probability state of the special symbol is about to end, so that the high probability state of the special symbol is about to end. Set a display command that suggests that is terminated (S5406). Here, in the present embodiment, the ending suggestion notification for suggesting the timing when the high probability state of the special symbol actually ends is performed when the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (after, the special figure of one rotation). It is configured to be executed when the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when the fluctuation is executed, but the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 2 without limitation. When the above specific value (for example, 5) is reached, the above-mentioned ending suggestion notification may be executed.

After finishing the processing of S5406, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation count counter 223ca is 0 (S5407), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining count counter 223ca is 0 (S5407; Yes), Next, an end display command for suggesting that the high-probability state of the special symbol ends is set (S5408), the hit discard flag 112 cab is set to off (FIG. S5409), and the process proceeds to S5410. on the other hand. In the processing of S5407, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is larger than 1, that is, when it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol continues (S5407: No), S5410 is used as it is. Move to processing.

When the process of S5410 is executed, first, it is determined whether the number-related command received this time is a number-of-times command (S5410), and if it is determined to be a number-of-times command (S5410: Yes), it is included in the number-of-times command. Based on the information indicating the value of the probability change counter 203 cg, the value of the probability change remaining number counter 223ca is set to “50” (S5411), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5410 that the command is not the number of times command (S5410: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing content of S5406 executed in the above-mentioned number-of-times related processing (see S4252 in FIG. 128) will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, there are a probabilistic state and a latent probabilistic state as game states in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a different production mode is executed in each game state. There is. Specifically, the challenge mode effect (see FIG. 89) is executed when the probability change state is set, and the RUSH mode effect (see FIG. 90) is executed when the latent state is set. .. Then, when the process of S5406 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a latent state, and a display command corresponding to the determination result is set. There is. Not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, a display command suggesting that the high-probability state of the special symbol ends regardless of the game state is set, and the display control device 114 side receives the display command. In this case, the end suggestion effect corresponding to the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed.

Next, the contents of the small hit-related process 4 (S5054) will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S5054). The small hit-related process 4 (S5054) is the above-mentioned small hit-related process (see S5004 in FIG. 71) in that a process for setting an effect mode during the small hit game executed in the latent state is added. Is different from. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit-related process 4 (S5054) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251). In this process, the current gaming state stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and the determination is executed based on the read information. If it is determined in the process of S5251 that the current game state is not the latent state (S5251: No), a small hit display command corresponding to the current game state is set, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is not an appropriate game to execute the small hit game in a state where the latent state is not set, for example, an error notification (comment of "Please hit left"). It is configured to execute the display during the small hit game including.

On the other hand, in the process of S5251 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251: Yes), then it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is the small hit B. (S5252), if it is determined that the small hit B is (S5252: Yes), the hit discard flag 223cc is set to ON (S5253), and the process proceeds to S5254. On the other hand, in the processing of S5252, if it is determined that the small hit type this time is not the small hit B (small hit A) (S5252: No), the processing of S5253 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5254. ..

In the processing of S5254, it is determined whether the hit discard flag 223 cab is set to ON (S5254), and if it is set to ON (S5254: Yes), regardless of the small hit type of the winning small hit this time. The display mode is determined with reference to the small hit A table of the small hit display selection table 222ca (S5256), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S5254 that the hit discard flag 223 cc is not set to ON (S5254), it is small based on the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg and the value of the acquired effect counter (not shown). The display mode during the small hit game is determined from the hit display selection table 222ca (S5255), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and this process is terminated.

That is, in the small hit-related process 4 (S5054 in FIG. 129) executed in the present embodiment, the small hit B of the small hit display selection table 222ca is selected only when the small hit B is won for the first time after the latent probability state is set. It is configured to set the display mode by referring to the table. That is, the display mode is determined using a dedicated table (table for small hit B) only at the time of small hit winning that can discard the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation, and other small hit winning (small hit A winning and already). Special Figure 1 When the small hit B is won after discarding the big hit fluctuation, a common table (table for small hit A) is used to determine the display mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small hit type of the small hit that was won after discarding the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues (the number of times the special figure changes) is defined, the special figure change is discarded based on the small hit winning, and the number of times the special figure changes is useless. Can be obscured to be subtracted.

<First production example showing an example of the production performed in each of the above-described embodiments>
As described above, in the first to third embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. During the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol (the period during which the special symbol (identification information) for indicating that the jackpot has been won is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed)), the other special symbol is stopped indicating the small hit winning. When the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed in the mode, the small hit game based on the stopped display small hit is executed, and the technical concept of forcibly removing the running big hit fluctuation and stopping (discarding the big hit) is explained. did.

Further, the above-mentioned first embodiment is configured so that the jackpot winning of the second special symbol is easier to execute the jackpot game which is advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a small hit can be won only by a lottery of special symbols. In addition, as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is more difficult to be executed than the advantageous gaming state (for example, the latent state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the advantageous gaming state (latent state). It is configured so that a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal state) can be set.

In the first embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol from being executed in the state where the advantageous gaming state is set. That is, by discarding the jackpot by winning the small hit, it is possible to provide a player's advantageous state (a state that is more advantageous than the case where the jackpot is not discarded).

Further, in the second embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation display of the special symbol for showing the jackpot winning is executed from the timing. The period until the variation display ends is configured to set the latent probability state, and the latent probability state is configured to be a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

Then, as in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won, and the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). , The variable display of the first special symbol being executed is configured to be forcibly terminated (the jackpot is discarded) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the jackpot of the first special symbol is discarded based on the fact that the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the end condition of the latent state is also combined. Since it can be discarded, the period in which the latent state is set can be longer than the initially set period (the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol). That is, by discarding the big hit by winning the small hit, it is possible to prolong the period in which the player's advantageous state (latent state) is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, any of the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in a small hit. However, if a small hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol, the other big hit can be discarded.

In the third embodiment configured in this way, when a gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the latent state may end due to the execution of the jackpot game. It can be suppressed from occurring. That is, by discarding the big hit by winning the small hit, it is possible to prolong the period in which the player's advantageous state (latent state) is set.

As described above, in each of the above embodiments, the player can be given a first privilege game (big hit game) that can give a privilege advantageous to the player, and a privilege less than the first privilege game (big hit game). The second privilege game (small hit game) is configured to be executable, and depending on the situation in which the second privilege game is executed, a special privilege (setting an advantageous game state or advantageous) is given to the player. It is configured so that an extension of the period in which the game state is set) can be given.

Further, when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied, the condition for executing the first privilege game is discarded, but the timing when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied is satisfied. Or, depending on the game content of the first privilege game executed based on the discarded condition, when the condition for executing the first privilege game is destroyed based on the establishment of the condition for executing the second privilege game. Is configured to be more advantageous to the player than if it is not discarded.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the condition for executing the second privilege game is satisfied, specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode for showing the small hit winning. If this is done, a privilege other than the privilege for executing the second privilege game (small hit game) (for example, a privilege for discarding a jackpot for which a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player among a plurality of jackpot types is set, or It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the player is given a privilege (such as a privilege to discard the jackpot that ends the advantageous game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect for showing the player that the small hit has been won is executed, not only the presence or absence of the small hit winning but also the small hit game other than the small hit game given by the small hit winning is performed. It is configured to inform the player of the presence or absence of the privilege. Here, in this production example, the content of the production at the time of winning a small hit, which is executed in the pachinko machine 10 having the technical idea of each of the above-described embodiments, will be described.

In this production example, as an effect for showing a small hit winning (small hit suggestion effect), a winning / failing mode indicating the presence / absence of a small hit winning and a discarding mode indicating the lottery content of a special symbol discarded by the small hit winning are used. , Is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, as the winning / failing mode, the first winning / failing mode formed by the letter "V" for notifying the small hit winning and the letter "sorry" for notifying the small hit non-winning are formed. At least the second winning / failing mode and the third winning / failing mode formed by the character "?" To inform (suggest) whether or not a small hit has been won are made displayable, and the big hit is won as a discard mode. The first discard mode formed by the letters "lucky" to notify that the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is discarded, and the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that has not won the jackpot is discarded. The second discard mode formed by the display mode of "??" for notifying the above, and the notification that the change (lottery) of the special symbol is simply discarded without suggesting the lottery result of the discarded special symbol. The third discard mode, which is formed by the character "destroy", is configured to be at least displayable.

By setting the effect mode in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the small hit is won and the content of discarding the special symbol change executed based on the small hit, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to provide fun to predict future game contents.

In this production example, the above-mentioned winning / failing mode and the discarding mode are configured to be displayed in different modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning / failing determination result of the small hit and the discarding mode are discarded. It may be configured to set the display mode of one effect mode (fusion mode) based on both the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, since it is possible to predict a plurality of game results from the displayed fusion mode, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game content.

Further, in this production example, the pass / fail mode and the discard mode are displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail mode is displayed and then the discard mode is displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the pass / fail mode after displaying the discard mode. In this way, by making the display timings of the above-mentioned two modes (whether or not mode, discard mode) different, it is possible to easily predict the mode to be displayed next after confirming the mode displayed earlier. .. In addition, the game can be played while hoping that a predetermined aspect is displayed as the content of the next aspect displayed after grasping the previously displayed aspect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this production example, when a small hit is won (stopped and displayed by a small hit symbol) in one special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), the change of the other special symbol is executed. If there is no special symbol change that is discarded by the small hit winning this time, the above-mentioned discarding mode is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the game status at the time of winning the small hit based on the display mode displayed at the time of winning the small hit (when the small hit symbol is stopped).

Further, in this production example, when the lottery result of the special symbol discarded based on the small hit winning is a big hit, the big hit type set in association with the big hit is determined, and based on the determination result. It is configured so that the display mode (display mode of the first discard mode) can be changed. In addition, the game state set at the time of winning the small hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit) is determined, and the display mode (first discard mode) is also based on the determination result. The display mode) is configured to be variable. Specifically, it is configured to set the above-mentioned pass / fail mode and discard mode only when the latent state is set as the game state. With this configuration, only when the game is greatly affected by discarding the other special symbol change that is being executed based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is won in a small hit, the winning / failing mode and Since the effect using the discard mode can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Second production example showing an example of the production performed in each of the above-described embodiments>
In the above-mentioned first production example, the production for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to be discarded based on the small hit winning to the player has been described. By executing such an effect, it is possible to suggest to the player various benefits given based on winning the small hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .. On the other hand, as in each of the above-described embodiments, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in one special symbol, a small hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol (conditions for executing the small hit game are satisfied). As a result, the playability that makes it possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player is a new playability that has never existed in the past. Therefore, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in one special symbol, the other There was a risk that the privilege could not be obtained without playing a game aiming for a small hit with the special design of.

Therefore, in this second production example, a production for aiming for a small hit winning with the other special symbol based on the fluctuation status (lottery result) of one special symbol will be described in detail.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) change executed during the latent state is a big hit, and it is a big hit (the special figure change during execution is a big hit). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot is variable), it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is being executed or whether the special figure 2 hold exists. Here, if it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery is being executed or the special figure 2 hold exists, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is obtained by winning the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery. Since it is possible to discard it, a normal right-handed notification is executed for the player.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is being executed during the latent probability state, the special figure 2 lottery is not being executed, and the special figure 2 hold does not exist, the state remains as it is. Then, since it is not possible to discard the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation based on the small hit winning, the strong right-handed notification that emphasizes the right-handed game to the player rather than the normal right-handed notification is given. Run. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning from being executed during the latent state, and the disadvantageous situation is provided to the player.

It should be noted that the second effect example is not limited to the above-mentioned effect mode, and for example, when the special figure 1 change during execution is not a big hit, that is, when the change is out of order, the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Even if it is not inside and there is no special figure 2 hold, it is configured not to execute the strong right-handed notification. Further, in this case, during the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed (during the long fluctuation), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is not executed, and the special figure 2 lottery may be executed. Since there is no such state, it is possible to execute an effect display informing the player that the game can be temporarily rested and the player can leave the seat.

As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the winning prize is a trigger for each lottery. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes lottery in the order in which information is acquired (the order of entry into the first entry port 64 and entry into the second entry opening 640), and the lottery of one of the special symbols. It may be configured to be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the type to be executed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, and when a specific jackpot is won in either symbol, the other symbol is stopped when the fluctuation is stopped. It is configured to discard the fluctuation (forced stop due to disconnection) or to execute the interruption, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Furthermore, even if a small hit is won due to the change of the other special symbol, the change of the other special symbol is discarded or interrupted according to the small hit type, but the change of the small hit starts. It may be set at times.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described, but the effects have the same purpose and effect. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that makes the player surely grasp the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly informs the content are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main control unit 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the above-mentioned set values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When various configurations are used, various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value. In the set value of, if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from one special symbol is performed. Various parameters may be specified for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be limited to the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the motivation of the player who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) can be changed. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. And, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when it becomes a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits discard big hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to other than the specific first determination result based on the established condition during the specified period. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a switching means capable of switching between and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first control for forcibly making a result other than a specific first determination result according to a condition in which the dynamically displayed first identification information is established, and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display. Since it is switched and executed by the switching means, the content of the first identification information dynamically displayed can be different from that at the start of the dynamic display, and various effects can be provided to the player. As a result, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Under the above condition, in the gaming machine A1, the switching means is provided with the first type privilege in the second privilege during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. As the first condition, the first control can be executed, and the second type privilege in the second privilege is given during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed, with the second condition being the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the privilege given can be switched, so that the gaming machine A2 is given to the player. It has the effect of making it easier to recognize the benefits.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means executes dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination of the specific first determination result as at least one of the conditions for satisfying the first condition. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is conditioned on the fact that it has been played.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the condition for satisfying the first condition is that the first identification information based on the determination as a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Since it is set to at least one of the above, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the granting of the first privilege and limit the privilege to be granted.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first privilege is set to be more advantageous than the second privilege, so that the first privilege is forcibly stopped. By suppressing this, there is an effect that the problem that the gambling property becomes high in a short period of time can be suppressed and the second privilege can be easily given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming state setting means has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The means is characterized in that it is possible to set the first gaming state based on the grant of the first privilege while the second gaming state is set. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the granting of the first privilege is restricted by the execution of the first control, so that the first gaming state is not granted instead of the first privilege. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's interest is significantly reduced due to the transition from the second gaming state.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming machine A6 has a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect for facilitating the establishment of the first condition.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a suggestion effect that makes it easier for the first condition to be satisfied is executed, so that the first condition is satisfied by executing the suggestion effect. It has the effect of making people expect and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic B group> (Variable difficulty in discarding large hit fluctuations due to small hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. (1) The gaming machine B1 comprising: a first control means capable of executing control and a frequency variable means capable of varying the frequency at which the first condition is satisfied.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency at which the first control is executed can be changed by the frequency changing means, the frequency at which the first privilege is given can be changed, and the game becomes monotonous. It has the effect of suppressing problems that cause people to get bored early.

In the gaming machine B1, the first condition can be satisfied based on the fact that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The frequency-variable means is characterized in that the establishment frequency is changed by changing the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be changed by changing the second dynamic display period corresponding to the specific second determination result to be determined, so that it is easy. There is an effect that the frequency can be changed by various controls.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, as the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means, a short dynamic display period group in which a short dynamic display period is easily selected and a long dynamic display period group are used. A long dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is easily selected and a long dynamic display period group are set, and the frequency variable means is either the short dynamic display period group or the long dynamic display period group. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the establishment frequency is changed by setting one of them.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment frequency can be changed by switching the dynamic display period group. Therefore, by setting various dynamic display period groups, it is possible to change the establishment frequency. It has the effect of being able to switch the frequency of establishment in various ways.

<Characteristic C group> (Variable period of advantage by winning small hits)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting the above, the gaming state setting means is the first during a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is possible to switch from one gaming state to the second gaming state and set it, and the gaming machine is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first privilege is granted. The game state is set, and the first condition is dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. (1) The gaming machine C1 comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to avoid switching to the gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player by executing the first control, so that the gaming is performed with the expectation that the first condition is satisfied. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine C2, which is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the second privilege is given, so that the first privilege is given and it is possible to avoid setting a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the grant of the second privilege, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means can determine a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and is based on the determination as the special second determination result. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a special privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given to the player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given to the player by the second determination, so that the granting of the first privilege is restricted. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that reduces the player's motivation to play.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied even when the special privilege is given.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is regulated that the first privilege is given even when the special privilege is given, which is disadvantageous to the player. While restricting the setting of the gaming state, it has the effect of giving the player a special privilege and improving the interest of the gaming.

When the special privilege is granted in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted until the cancellation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the special privilege is given, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, so that the special privilege is given. Even after that, there is an effect that the result of the first judgment can be made interesting.

<Characteristic D group> (Aim for advantageous jackpot during jackpot fluctuation (remove replay on ST machine))
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided by a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for indicating the second determination result specific to the display means. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting the above, the game state setting means is based on the fact that the first privilege is given when the second game state is set. , The first gaming state is set, and the second gaming state is switched to the first gaming state and set based on the number of determinations by the first determining means or the second determining means being the number of endings. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine D1, the player may be switched to the first gaming state when the number of determinations reaches the end number, or the first privilege may be given and the first gaming state may be set. It is possible to play a variety of games, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, is based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result, and the second gaming. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is possible to set the state and then set the first gaming state after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the period of the second gaming state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. It has the effect of making the player interested in the dynamic display period and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first identification that is dynamically displayed is based on the satisfaction of the first condition during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized by having a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to forcibly make a result other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent the transition to the gaming state, and there is an effect that the expectation for the establishment of the first condition can be raised and the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first condition is that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to be established on the condition of.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is a requirement that the first condition can be satisfied that the second privilege is given, so that the value for the second privilege can be increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic E group> (C group production for the remaining period of advantageous period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided in a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for showing the display means a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. During the period, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition. 1 Suggestion suggesting the remaining period of the first dynamic display period when the first control means capable of executing the control and the first identification information that is the specific first determination result are dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an effect.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine E1, when a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, a suggestion mode suggesting the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, and the first condition is satisfied. 1 The player can recognize the period during which the grant of the privilege is restricted, can be interested in the timing when the first privilege is granted, and suppresses the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine E1 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is the first. 1 When the gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. The featured gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of increasing the value.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is a condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is configured so as to be established.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition can be satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given, so that the value of the second privilege being given is valued. It has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic F group> (Notifies the period when the small hit win is advantageous)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing, the first privilege granting means that can grant the first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second determination means that can execute the second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. The second identification information is provided by a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information and a display mode for indicating the second determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the second privilege is granted based on the timing of granting the second privilege. The gaming machine F1 characterized by having a privilege variable means for varying the privilege to be given.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given by the second privilege is changed depending on the timing of granting the second privilege, the player can be interested in the timing when the second privilege is granted. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine F1, the dynamic display is performed based on the execution of the granting of the second privilege during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to avoid the granting of the first privilege by executing the first control, and it is possible to increase the value of the second privilege. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege, and is granted when the first control is executed. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it can notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege that can be obtained.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that was not granted by the suggestion information, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. be.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the contents of destruction)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means. , A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination. , The second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the second dynamic display means. In a gaming machine having a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is When displayed, the privilege type to be granted to the player is the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege corresponding to one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types, and the first dynamic display means. During the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly specified. If the specific first determination result is given by the first control means capable of executing the first control other than the first determination result and the first privilege granting means when the first control is executed. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a notifying means for notifying suggestive information capable of suggesting information corresponding to the type of the first privilege.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game executed when the game ball wins the start winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize the type of the first privilege that was not granted due to the execution of the first control by the suggestion information, and the player can improve the interest of the game and the player can be early. It has the effect of suppressing problems that make you tired of playing games.

In the gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied on condition that the second privilege is given when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the first condition can be satisfied by giving the second privilege, so that there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the grant of the second privilege, and the effect executing means changes the effect based on the suggestion information. A gaming machine G3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the effect executed based on the granting of the second privilege is varied by the suggestion information, so that the first privilege and the granting are given. It is possible to compare with the second privilege to be given, and there is an effect that the interest can be enhanced.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the end of the hit state. In this conventional gaming machine, by different types of starting winning openings that the player mainly wins in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game is different depending on the change in the gaming state, and various games are played. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).
However, the lottery game executed when the game ball wins the starting winning opening is only displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. There was a problem.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means. The first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first dynamic display means and the first dynamic display period capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. When the first identification information is displayed on the determination means and the display means for showing the specific first determination result, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given. The giving means, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second determination means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means. The target display means, the second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first item specific to the display means. 2 The second privilege granting means, which can grant the second privilege advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the determination result, is provided, and the second privilege is provided. It has a privilege variable means for varying the privilege given by the second privilege based on the grant timing of the above.
In the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, the second privilege is granted during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. The first control capable of forcibly excluding the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information other than the specific first determination result is possible. It has a control means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege. When the first control is executed, the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege that could be given can be notified.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. A first dynamic display means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display period. When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the specific first determination result on the display means, the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the first privilege granting means. A second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means by the second determination means. , A second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the second determination result specific to the display means. It has a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege which is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing, and at the timing of granting the second privilege. Based on this, it has a privilege variable means for varying the privilege given by the second privilege.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the first, which is dynamically displayed, based on the execution of the grant of the second privilege during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. It has a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the identification information is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result.
Therefore, by executing the first control, it is possible to avoid the granting of the first privilege, and there is an effect that the value of the second privilege can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege, and can be granted when the first control is executed. It is possible to notify the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege.
Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the type of the first privilege that has not been granted by the suggestion information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
114 Display control means (first dynamic display means, part of second dynamic display means)
S307 First dynamic display period determining means
S405 First determination means
S2404 1st privilege granting means, 2nd privilege granting means
S452, S2706 Part of the game state setting means

Claims (3)

A first determination means capable of executing the first determination,
A first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the first determination result by the first determination means on the display means.
A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a first dynamic display period determining means.
When the first identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the specific first determination result on the display means, the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the first privilege granting means.
A second determination means capable of executing the second determination,
A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result on the display means by the second determination means.
A second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period determining means.
When the second identification information is displayed in the display mode for showing the specific second determination result on the display means, the second privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the second privilege granting means. In a gaming machine that has
A gaming machine characterized by having a privilege variable means for varying the privilege granted by the second privilege based on the timing of granting the second privilege. The first identification information that is dynamically displayed based on the execution of the grant of the second privilege during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control in which the first determination result corresponding to the above is forcibly set to other than the specific first determination result. .. The first privilege granting means grants one privilege type from a plurality of different privilege types as the first privilege.
The first or second claim, wherein when the first control is executed, the suggestion information based on the privilege type in the first privilege that could be given can be notified. Gaming machine.

Images